Used Parameters - STÃBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG

APPLICATION 

Fast Reference Value 

5 th Generation of STÖBER Inverters 

FUNCTIONS 

DETAILS 

PARAMETER 

from V 5.6-D 

11/2011 EN

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK 

Table of Contents 


i 


1. Notes on Safetey .................................................... 1 

1.1 Software ................................................................................. 6 

1.2 Presentation of notes on safety ……....................................... 7 

2. Function Description ……...................................... 8 

2.1 Block Circuit Diagram ….......................................................... 8 

2.2 Interface ………....................................................................... 9 

2.2.1 Input Signals ……………………............................................... 10 

2.2.2 Output Signals ……………………............................................ 10 

2.2.3 Process Data Imaging ……..……………….............................. 11 

2.3 Assistant for Parameter Entry …………................................... 12 

3. Details ………………………..................................... 13 

3.1 Speed Controller …………………………………....................... 13 

3.2 Local Operation ………………….............................................. 14 

3.3 A45 Quick Stop End ……………………................................... 15 

3.4 EMERGENCY OFF Activation …............................................. 16 

3.5 Torque Limit ………….……...................................................... 17 

3.6 Brake Activation 

(only for Application Fast Ref. Value with Brake Activation) .... 18 

3.7 Analog Inputs/Outputs ……….................................................. 19 

3.7.1 Analog Inputs ………….…….................................................... 19 

3.7.2 Analog Outputs ........................................................................ 19 

3.8 Application Events ……………................................................. 20 

3.9 Communication with CAN ……………………………………..… 20 

3.10 Communication with PROFIBUS ……………………………….. 20 

3.11 Communication with EtherCAT …………………………………. 21 

3.12 Communication with PROFINET ………………………………. 21 

3.13 Mapping …………………….…………………………………….. 21 

4. Used Parameters ……………………….................... 22 

4.1 Parameter Legend …………………………………................... 22 

4.2 Parameter List …………………............................................... 22 

www.stoeber.de 

ID 441727.02




i 

- This page was purposely left blank - 


ID 441727.02


Notes on Safety 


01 

1 Notes on Safety 

When in operation, inverters from STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. 

KG may have energized or rotating parts depending on their protection rating. 

Surfaces may heat up. For these reasons, comply with the following: 

• The safety notes listed in the following sections and points 

• The technical rules and regulations 

In addition, always read the mounting instructions and the short commissioning 

instructions. 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG accepts no liability for 

damages caused by non-adherence to the instructions or applicable 

regulations. Subject to technical changes to improve the devices without prior 

notice. 

This documentation is purely a product description. It does not represent 

promised properties in the sense of warranty law. 

Component part of the product 

The technical documentation is a component part of a product. 

• Since the technical documentation contains important information, always 

keep it handy in the vicinity of the device until the machine is disposed of. 

• If the product is sold, disposed of, or rented out, always include the 

technical documentation with the product. 

Operation in accordance with its intended use 

In the sense of DIN EN 50178 (previously VDE 0160), the POSIDRIVE ® 

FDS 5000 and MDS 5000 and the POSIDYN ® SDS 5000 model series 

represent the electrical equipment of power electronics for the control of power 

flow in high-voltage current systems. They are designed exclusively to power: 

• Servo motors (MDS 5000, SDS 5000) 

• Asynchronous motors (FDS 5000, MDS 5000 and SDS 5000) 

Operation for purposes other than the intended use include the connection of 

other electrical loads! 

Before the manufacturer is allowed to put a machine on the market, he must 

have a danger analysis prepared as per machine guideline 98/37/EG. This 

analysis establishes the dangers connected with the use of the machine. The 

danger analysis is a multi-stage, iterative process. Since this documentation 

cannot begin to provide sufficient insight into the machine guidelines, please 

carefully study the latest standards and legal situation yourself. After the drive 

controller has been installed in machines, it cannot be commissioned until it 

has been determined that the machine complies with the regulations of EG 

guideline 98/37/EG. 


ID 441727.02 

1


01 



Ambient conditions 

Model series POSIDRIVE ® FDS 5000 and MDS 5000 and POSIDYN ® 

SDS 5000 are products of the restricted sales class as described in IEC 61800- 

3. This product may cause high-frequency interference in residential zones and 

the user may be asked to take suitable measures. 

The inverters are not designed for use in public low-voltage networks which 

power residential areas. High-frequency interference must be expected when 

the inverters are used in such a network. 

The inverters are only intended for use in TN networks. 

The inverters are only designed for use on supply current networks which can 

delivery at the most a maximum of symmetrical rated short circuit current at 

480 Volts as per the following table: 

Max. symmetrical rated short circuit 

Device family Size 

current 

FDS 5000, 

MDS 5000, 

SDS 5000 

BG 0 and 

BG 1 

5000 A 

MDS 5000 

BG 2 

5000 A 

SDS 5000 BG 3 10000 A 

Install the inverter in a switching cabinet in which the permissible maximum 

surrounding air temperature is not exceeded (see mounting instructions). 

The following applications are prohibited: 

• Use in potentially explosive areas 

• Use in environments with harmful substances as per EN 60721 (e.g., oils, 

acids, gases, fumes, powders, irradiation) 

• Use with mechanical vibration and impact stresses which exceed the 

information in the technical data of the mounting instructions 

Implementation of the following applications is only permitted when STÖBER 

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG has been contacted first for permission: 

• Use in non-stationary applications 

Qualified personnel 

Since the drive controllers of the model series POSIDRIVE ® FDS 5000, 

POSIDRIVE ® MDS 5000 and POSIDYN ® SDS 5000 may harbor residual risks, 

all configuration, transportation, installation and commissioning tasks including 

operation and disposal may only be performed by trained personnel who are 

aware of the possible risks. 


ID 441727.02 

2


01 



Personnel must have the qualifications required for the job. The following table 

lists examples of occupational qualifications for the jobs: 

Activity 

Possible occupational qualifications 

Transportation and storage Worker skilled in storage logistics or 

comparable training 

Configuration 

• Graduate engineer (electrotechnology 

or electrical power 

technology) 

• Technician (m/f) (electro-technology) 

Installation and connection Electronics technician (m/f) 

Commissioning (of a standard 

application) 

Programming 

Operation 

Disposal 


• Master electro technician (m/f) 

Graduate engineer (electro-technology or 

electrical power technology) 


• Master electro technician (m/f) 

Electronics technician (m/f) 

In addition, the valid regulations, the legal requirements, the reference books, 

this technical documentation and, in particular, the safety information contained 

therein must be carefully: 

• read 

• understood and 

• complied with. 

Transportation and storage 

Immediately upon receipt, examine the delivery for any transportation 

damages. Immediately inform the transportation company of any damages. If 

damages are found, do not commission the product. 

If the device is not to be installed immediately, store it in a dry, dust-free room. 

Please see the mounting instructions for how to commission an inverter after it 

has been in storage for a year or longer. 

Installation and connection 

Installation and connection work are only permitted after the device has been 

isolated from the power! 

The accessory installation instructions allow the following actions during the 

installation of accessories: 

• The housing of the MDS 5000, SDS 5000 and FDS 5000 in the upper slot 

can be opened. 

• The housing of the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000 in the bottom slot can be 

opened. 

Opening the housing in another place or for other purposes is not permitted. 


ID 441727.02 

3




01 

Use only copper lines. For the line cross sections to be used, see table 310-16 

of the NEC standard for 60 o C or 75 o C. 

Protect the device from falling parts (pieces of wire, leads, metal parts, and so 

on) during installation or other tasks in the switching cabinet. Parts with conductive 

properties inside the inverter can cause short circuits or device failure. 

The motor must have an integrated temperature monitor with basic isolation in 

acc. with EN 61800-5-1 or external motor overload protection must be used. 

The permissible protection class is protective ground. Operation is not 

permitted unless the protective conductor is connected in accordance with the 

regulations. 

Comply with the applicable instructions for installation and commissioning of 

motor and brakes. 

Commissioning, operation and service 

Remove additional coverings before commissioning so that the device cannot 

overheat. During installation, provide the free spaces specified in the mounting 

instructions to prevent the inverter from overheating. 

The housing of the drive controller must be closed before you turn on the 

supply voltage. When the supply voltage is on, dangerous voltages can be 

present on the connection terminals and the cables and motor terminals 

connected to them. Remember that the device is not necessarily de-energized 

after all indicators have gone off. 

When network voltage is applied, the following are prohibited: 

• Opening the housing 

• Connecting or disconnecting the connection terminals 

• Installing accessories 

Proceed as shown below to perform these tasks: 

1. Disable the enable (X1). 

2. Turn off the supply voltage (power pack and controller power supply 

as well as any auxiliary voltages for encoder, brake, etc.). 

3. Protect the supply voltages from being turned on again. 

4. Wait 5 minutes (time the DC link capacitors need to discharge). 

5. Determine isolation from the voltage. 

6. Short circuit the network input and ground it. 

7. Cover the adjacent, voltage-carrying parts. 

You can then start your work on the drive controller. 

Repairs may only be performed by STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + 

Co. KG. 

Send defective devices together with a fault description to: 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG 

Abteilung VS-EL 

Kieselbronner Str. 12 

75177 Pforzheim 

GERMANY 


ID 441727.02 

4




01 

Disposal 

Please comply with the latest national and regional regulations! 

Dispose of the individual parts separately depending on their nature and 

currently valid regulations such as, for example: 

• Electronic scrap (PCBs) 

• Plastic 

• Sheet metal 

• Copper 

• Aluminum 

Residual dangers 

The connected motor can be damaged with certain settings of drive controllers. 

• Longer operation against an applied motor halting brake 

• Longer operation of self-cooled motors at slow speeds 

Drives can reach dangerous excess speeds (e.g., setting of high output 

frequencies for motors and motor settings which are unsuitable for this). 

Secure the drive accordingly. 


ID 441727.02 

5




01 

1.1 Software 

Using the POSITool software 

The POSITool software package can be used to select the application and 

adjust the parameters and signal monitoring of the 5th generation of STÖBER 

inverters. The functionality is specified by selecting an application and 

transmitting these data to an inverter. 

The program is the property of STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG 

and is copyrighted. The program is licensed for the user. 

The software is only provided in machine-readable form. 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG gives the customer a nonexclusive 

right to use the program (license) provided it has been legitimately 

obtained. 

The customer is authorized to use the program for the above activities and 

functions and to make copies of the program, including a backup copy for 

support of this use, and to install same. 

The conditions of this license apply to each copy. The customer promises to 

affix the copyright notation to each copy of the program and all other property 

notations. 

The customer is not authorized to use, copy, change or pass on/transmit the 

program for purposes other than those in these regulations. The customer is 

also not authorized to convert the program (i.e., reverse assembly, reverse 

compilation) or to compile it in any other way. The customer is also not 

authorized to issue sublicenses for the program, or to rent or lease it out. 

Product maintenance 

The obligation to maintain refers to the two latest program versions created by 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG and approved for use. 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will either correct program 

errors or will provide the customer with a new program version. This choice will 

be made by STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG. If, in individual 

cases, the error cannot be immediately corrected, STÖBER ANTRIEBS- 

TECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will provide an intermediate solution which may 

require the customer to comply with special operation regulations. 

A claim to error correction only exists when the reported errors are reproducible 

or can be indicated with machine-generated outputs. Errors must be reported in 

a reconstructable form and provide information which is useful to error correction. 

The obligation to correct errors ceases to exist for such programs which the 

customer changes or edits in any way unless the customer can prove that such 

action is not the cause of the reported error. 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG will keep the respective valid 

program versions in an especially safe place (fireproof data safe, bank deposit 

box). 


ID 441727.02 

6




01 

1.2 Presentation of notes on safety 

NOTICE 

Notice 

means that property damage may occur if the stated 

precautionary measures are not taken. 

CAUTION 

Caution 

with warning triangle means that minor injury may occur if 

the stated precautionary measures are not taken. 

WARNING 

Warning 

means that there may be a serious danger of death if the 

stated precautionary measures are not taken. 

DANGER 

Danger 

means that serious danger of death exists if the stated 

precautionary measures are not taken. 

Information 

indicates important information about the product or a 

highlighted portion of the documentation which requires 

special attention. 


ID 441727.02 

7


Function Description 


02 

2 Function Description 

The devices of the 5th generation of STÖBER inverters control the motor 

speed with the application fast reference value and fast reference value with 

brake activation. 

The following functions are available: 

• Reference value specification, depending on the selection of the 

configuration, via terminals, fieldbus (CAN, PROFIBUS or EtherCAT) or 

serial (USS). 

• Reverse via negative reference value or via binary control signal (bus or 

terminal). 

• Quick stop either via bus or terminal. 

• Integrated reference value generator for speed-control optimization. 

• Activation of a halting brake (only in the application fast reference value with 

brake activation) 

2.1 Block Circuit Diagram 

The block circuit diagram (Figure 2-1, see on the next page) shows the 

structural organization of the fast reference value. 

In the selector D130, the source of the reference value is specified. The 

parameter D100 is used as the source for a binary signal for reverse. When the 

two signals are linked, a reference value characteristic curve is calculated from 

the specifications from the D.. parameters (D00, D01, D02 and D80). D00 and 

D01 specify acceleration or deceleration ramp. The speed at maximum 

reference value specification is entered in D02 (e.g., 3000 Rpm with analog 

reference value of 10 V). The characteristic curve is smoothed with the 

parameter D80. A constant speed can be added to the generated reference 

value. The speed is entered in D231. The reverse signal has no effect on this 

speed! 

After the addition, a limitation takes place to the maximum speed entered in the 

parameter C01. Then the reference value and the actual value are compared. 

The standard deviation is converted in the speed controller to the variable T- 

reference. The speed controller is described in chapter 3.3. The parameters 

specified in the ovals are indicator values. 


ID 441727.02 

8




02 

n-ref. val. 

relative 

Speed 

ref. value 

control 

word 

Reference 

value source 

0% 

AE1 

AE2 

AE3 

D230 

Low 

High 

D210.0 

BE1 

BE1 

BE13 

BE13 

D231 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

... 

27 

D130 

D100 

28 

n-reference 

value relative 

Negator 

D330 

Reverse 

source 

Reverse 

n-reference value 

high resolution 

D300 

D331 

(-1) 

n-reference value 

high resolution 

Ref. value, 

char. curve 

Speed (max. RV) 

D02 

Figure 2-1 Structure of the fast reference value application 

+ 

Speed 

limitation 

n-max 

C01 n-rmpg Speed T-reference 

controller 

E161 

E91 

E170 

n-motor 

T-ref. 

n-act. 

Shaft encoder 

2.2 Interface 

The device controller is selected during step 4 of the configuration assistant 

(POSITool). Depending on this selection, the controller of the inverter is 

connected via terminals or via a fieldbus system The selection of a device 

controller does not mean that the control and status signals are available 

exclusively via the selected controller. Fieldbus systems always permit mixed 

operation with control via terminals. For this reason the origin of the control and 

status signals for each application must be set in the particular selector (see 

table). 

When the setting "Parameter" is selected for the input signals in the selector, 

the value is calculated from the Fieldbus Image (see table). These parameters 

can be used to transfer values via a fieldbus system. The Indication 

Parameters (see table) can be used to monitor whether the signal path is set 

correctly. 

(Caution! Indication parameters are only visible in POSITool during online 

operation!) When no selector is specified for a signal, the value must be 

entered directly in the fieldbus image. 

For the control of the signals, see see operating manuals, chapter 8: 

• MDS 5000: ID 442285 

• FDS 5000: ID 442281 

• SDS 5000: ID 442289. 


ID 441727.02 

9


02 



2.2.1 Input Signals 

Signal Function Selector 

Image on 

Fieldbus 

(Bit) 

Indication 

Parameter 

Reference value 

Analog input or parameter (=Bus) determine 

the percentage weighting of maximum 

reference value in D02. 

D130 D230 D330 

High resolution 

reference value Additive reference value in Rpm. - D231 D331 

Reverse 

The signal changes the sign of the reference 

value signal n-reference value relative 

(s. page 2). 

D100 D210.0 D300 

External fault The fault 44:externalFault1 is triggered. D101 D210.1 - 

T-Max 

External torque specification (see chap. 3.4 

of application manual). 

C130 C230 C330 

Release brake 

Controls the relay of X2. (Manual control of 

the brake, unconditional release of the F100 A180.6 A903 

brake). 

Additional enable Additional enable A60 A180.0 A300 

Acknowledgment 

Acknowledgment for faults of the device 

state machine. 

A61 A180.1 A301 

Quick stop Decelerates the motor at the ramp in D81. A62 A180.2 A302 

Axis selector 

Selects the active axis during multiple-axis 

operation. 

A63 / 

A64 

A180.3 / .4 A41 

Axis disable Deactivates axis A65 A180.5 A305 

2.2.2 Output Signals 


Zero reached 

Reference 

value reached 

Signal is logical 1 when the 

motor speed drops below the 

value specified in C40. 

Signal is logical 1 when E06 n- 

reference is equal to E161 n- 

rmpg (except in case of quick 

stop). 

Image on 

Fieldbus 

(Bit) 

Indication 

Parameter 

F61…F70 depending on 

the option board used D200.0 D180 


the option board used 

D200.1 D181 


ID 441727.02 

10


02 




Torque limit 

Status pos. 

torque limit 

Status neg. 

torque limit 

Status pos. 

speed limit 

Status neg. 

speed limit 

Signal is logical 1 (see D182) 

when the speed controller 

requires a greater torque than 

specified in E62, E66. 


required torque exceeds the 

value of E62. 


required torque drops below the 

value of E66. 


positive maximum motor speed is 

reached. 


negative motor speed is reached. 



Image on 

Fieldbus 

(Bit) 

Indication 

Parameter 

D200.2 D182 


the option board used — E180 







The parameters listed in the Indication Parameter column can be circuited to 

an output depending on the type of signal (analog or binary) (see F40, F50, 

F61 … F70). 

2.2.3 Process Data Imaging 

The primary parameters for process data imaging 

Listed below are some of the primary parameters for process data imaging in 

fieldbus operation: 

• A180 Device control byte 

• E200 Device status byte 

• D200 Speed reference value statuts word 

• D210 Speed reference value control word 

• C230 Torque limit 

• D230 n-reference value relative 

• D231 n-reference value high resolution 

• Div. indication parameters (e.g. E..-group) 

Parameters for fieldbus scaling 

Both the following parameters define whether the values transmitted via 

fieldbus to the inverter are to be written in internal format (raw value) or are to 

be scaled. 

• For PROFIBUS A100 

• For CAN and EtherCAT A213 

— E183 


ID 441727.02 

11




02 

2.3 Assistant for Parameter Entry 

An assistant is available for quick and easy-to-understand provision of the 

primary parameters from the wide variety of parameters. 

After the project assistant is exited, the following screen is available showing all 

available assistants. 

Figure 2-2 View of available Assistants 

The assistant for the fast reference value can be started from this dialog or 

directly from the project directory tree. 

The following settings are predefined with the assistant: 

• Binary signal sources 

• Analog signal sources 

• Reference values 

• Ramps 

• Binary outputs 

• Analog outputs 

• Bus interface 

The assistant can also be used during "online" operation. 


ID 441727.02 

12


Details 


03 

3 Details 

3.1 Speed Controller 

For optimal behavior, the speed controller must be adjusted to the actual load 

conditions. POSITool offers a scope and a reference value generator for this 

(see operating manual POSITool, ID 442233). A flowchart of the speed 

controller is shown below for better comprehension of the technical control 

behavior. 

Integral time Reference Low pass filter 

n-controller torque filter Ref. torque low pass 

Proportional C32 

C37 C36 

Low pass 

gain 

reference speed n-controller 

C33 

C31 

Act. value 

Speed 

E161 

n-rmpg 

E07 

n-postramp 

E91 

n-motor 

C34 

n-motor 

low pass 

Figure 3-1 Structure of the speed controller 

100% - C37 

Act. value 

speed 

E170 

T-reference 

The dynamics of the speed controller primarily depend on the parameters C31 

(proportional gain n-controller) and C32 (integral time n-controller). They 

determine the proportional and integral gain of the speed controller. Too high a 

gain causes the motor to vibrate. Too low a gain reduces the dynamics. The 

default setting can usually be retained. If necessary, C31 is adjusted first. C32 

affects the load rigidity. 

The torque signal is filtered by C36. Parameter C37 can be used to set which 

percentage portion of the signal will be filtered. When C37=0, the T-reference 

value is not filtered. When C37=100, the entire signal is filtered. 


ID 441727.02 

13


Details 


03 

3.2 Local Operation 

The fast reference value application offers the following functions via the 

operator panel: 

• Error acknowledgment with the ESC key. 

• Parameter entry. 

• Local operation with the key. 

Local operation 

To access local operation, press the key. The following functions can then 

be implemented on the keyboard: 

• The I/O key is used to enable and disable the controller. 

• When the ESC key is pressed, the motor stops. 

• The keys are used to move at the speed specified in A51 as long as 

the key is pressed. The value specified in A52 applies to acceleration and 

deceleration ramp. 

• The keys are used to simulate a motor potentiometer. The value 

specified in A52 applies to acceleration and deceleration ramp. 

NOTICE 

If the device remains in device status switchon 

disable since the state is reached with a given enable 

(with bus operation, enable and additional enable), 

and if a change is then made to local operation, the 

inverter is enabled when local operation is exited! 

This can cause the drive to move. 


ID 441727.02 

14


Details 


03 

3.3 A45 Quick Stop End 

The parameter A45 defines the quick stop end. The following settings are 

available: 

• 0: standstill 

• 1: no stop 

The selection 0:standstill concludes the quick stop when the motor has reached 

the speed 0 rpm (± C40 n-window). The setting 1:no stop ends quick stop 

immediately when the quick stop signal is no longer queued. 

Q-stop 

n-mot 

at A45=1 

n-mot 

at A45=0 

Figure 3-2 Quick stop end based on how parameter A45 is set 


ID 441727.02 

15

Details 

03 



3.4 EMERGENCY OFF Activation 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK suggests the following control procedure to turn 

off the drive with EMERGENCY OFF. 

Information 

Only devices with the option "/L" (24-V supply) can still be 

accessed via serial interface or fieldbus after an emergency off. 

Q-stop 

n-mot 

Release 

Power 

U ZK 

A35 

E48 

7 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Released 

Quick stop 

active 

Ready for 

switch-on 

Switch-on disabled 

Figure 3-3 Control of the inverter during EMERGENCY OFF (suggestion of 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK) 


ID 441727.02 

16


Details 


03 

Procedure 

To obtain a defined process, the EMERGENCY OFF signal should trigger a 

quick stop. If the speed is zero, the release should be removed. The power 

supply can then be switched off. The diagrams U dc and E48 device control 

state show the resulting states of the inverter. When the power supply is 

switched off, the DC link voltage U dc will drop. When it reaches the value set in 

A35, the inverter changes to the device state switch-on disable. 

3.5 Torque Limit 

Several mechanisms act as torque limitations. 

• The signal selected in C130 Torque limit source. 

• The parameters C03 and C05. 

• The i 2 t model of the inverter (model for calculation of device heat-up). 

The values entered at these positions are compared. The lowest value is used 

for the torque limitation. 

The binary parameters E180 and E181 indicate whether the required torque is 

above the max. permissible torque (E62 or E66). 

0% 

C230 

AE1 

AE2 

AE3 

0% 

C230 

AE1 

AE2 

AE3 

Torque limit 

source 

C130 

C06 

C03 

i²t 

(-1) 

C05 

i²t 

Figure 3-4 Torque limits 

Factor 

torque limit 

Negator 

Min 

Max 

Status 

pos. T-Max 

limit reached 

T-Max 

T-Min 

E180 

E181 

Status 

neg. T-Max 

limit reached 

Act. pos. 

T-max 

E62 

E66 

Act. neg. 

T-max 

T-reference 

Remember that a torque limit can also occur when the motor is operated in the 

weak field range. 


ID 441727.02 

17


3.6 Brake Activation (Only for Application 

Fast Ref. Value with Brake Activation) 

Details 


03 

Information 

The difference between the applications Fast Reference Value 

and Fast Reference Value with Brake Activation is the brake 

activation. With the Fast Reference Value application, it is only 

possible to unconditionally open the brake via the signal defined 

in F100. The brake activation described below applies 

exclusively to the application Fast Reference Value with Brake 

Activation. 

Brake activation is activated in parameter F08. When F08 is parameterized to 

0:inactive, output X2 has the status of A900. If you set F08 = 1:active, the 

brake is activated by the application. Activation of the brake is triggered by 

setting the quick stop signal as well as removing the enable. The integral 

portion of the speed controller (reference torque) is saved at the moment the 

brake is set and restored when restart takes place. 

If the enable is deactivated (A900 = 0), the torque which was saved is deleted. 

If you set F08 = 2:do not save torque, triggering the brake is identical to the 

selection 1:active. However, with this setting, the integral portion of the speed 

controller (reference torque) is not saved. 


ID 441727.02 

18


Details 


03 

3.7 Analog Inputs/Outputs 

3.7.1 Analog Inputs 

AE1-level AE1-offset AE1-gain 

E10 F11 F12 

X100.1 

AE1 

X100.3 

16384 = 100% 

max = ±200% 

X100.4 

AE2 

X100.5 


E11 F21 F22 

16384 = 100% 

max = ±200% 

* X102.1 

AE3 

X102.2 

E74 

* Only when used with XEA 5001 

Figure 3-5 Structure of the analog inputs 

3.7.2 Analog Outputs 

Analogoutput1- 

source 

F40 

Analogoutput1-gain 

F42 

Analogoutput2-gain 

F52 


Analogoutput1-offset 

F41 

Analogoutput2-offset 

F51 

F31 

In % 

Figure 3-6 Structure of the analog outputs 

F32 

Analog- 

output2- 

source 

F50 

Analogoutput1-level 

E16 

Analogoutput2-level 

E28 

16384 = 100% 

max = ±200% 

AA1 X100.6 

AA2 X100.7 


ID 441727.02 

19

Details 

03 



3.8 Application Events 

In the fast reference value application, event 44:external fault can be triggered 

via an external signal. Triggering can take place via bus or a binary input 

(selector D101). 

Nr: Name 

Description 

External fault: 

Fault 

44:Text from U180 

Trigger 

Level: 

Applikationsspezifisch oder durch Option Freie 

Programmierung 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: 

Other: 

Event counter: 

Switch on/off device or programmed 

acknowledgment. 

Should only be used for application events which 

may not be set lower than the "fault" level. 

Z44 

3.9 Communication with CAN 

The following are available via the CAN fieldbus interface: 

• Two PDO channels (tx / rx). 

• One SDO channel (tx / rx). 

• If necessary, three additional SDO channels (tx / rx). 

Cf. operating manual CANopen ® , ID 441686. 

3.10 Communication with PROFIBUS 

The following are available via the PROFIBUS fieldbus interface: 

• GSD file 

• PPO 1: 4 PKW, 2 PZD 




• PPO 5: 4 PKW, 10 PZD 

• Support of the DP-V1 protocol 

Cf. operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687. 


ID 441727.02 

20


Details 


03 

3.11 Communication with EtherCAT 

The following are available via the EtherCAT fieldbus interface: 

• Two PDO channels (tx / rx). 

• One SDO channel (tx / rx). 

Cf. operating manual EtherCAT, ID 441896 

3.12 Communication with PROFINET 

The following are available via the PROFINET fieldbus interface: 

• The device description file in XML format 

• The transfer of different data lengths 

Cf. operating manual PROFINET, ID 442340. 

3.13 Mapping 

Preset parameters: 

1. mapped 

parameter 

2. mapped 

parameter 

3. mapped 

parameter 

Inverter SPS 

A180 

D230 

C230 

SPS Inverter 

1. mapped 

parameter 

E200 

2. mapped 

parameter 

E100 

3. mapped 

parameter 

E02 

4. mapped 

parameter 

D200 


ID 441727.02 

21

Used Parameters 


04 


4 Used Parameters 

4.1 Parameter Legend 

Par. Description Fieldbusaddress 

C230 

Global 

Torque limit: Specification for the torque limit (absolute value) via fieldbus if the signal source is 

C130=4:Parameter. 

24E6h 0h 

r=2, w=2 

Value range in %: -200 to 200 to 200 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value: 32767 = 200 %); USS address: 03 39 80 00 hex 

Global – Parameter is not dependent on 

axis. 

Achse – Parameter is axis-specific. 

Off – Parameter can only be changed 

when enable is off. 

Value range: 

Specification of unit, 

minimum and 

maximum value 

The default setting is 

underlined. 

PROFIBUS, PROFINET = PNU (PKW1) 

CAN-Bus = Index 

PROFIBUS, PROFINET = Subindex 

CAN-Bus = Subindex 

Access level for read (r=2) and 

write accesses (w=2) 

Fieldbus: 

1st position: Scaling for integer (PROFIBUS and CAN bus) 

2nd position: - PDO – Parameters can be imaged as process data. 

- Blank – Parameter can only be accessed via PKW (PROFIBUS) or SDO 

(CAN bus). 

3rd position: Data type. See operating manuals, chapter 3.2. 

4th position: Scaling for raw values 

5th position: USS address 

ID 441727.02 22



04 


4.2 Parameter List 

A.. Inverter 


A00.0 Save values & start: When this parameter is activated, the inverter saves the current 

2000h 0h 

Global 

configuration and the parameter values in the Paramodul. After power-off, the inverter starts with 

the saved configuration. If the configuration data on the inverter and Paramodul are identical, only 

r=0, w=0 the parameters are saved (speeds up the procedure). 

NOTE 

Do not turn off the power of the control section (device version /L:24V, device version /H: supply 

voltage) while the action is being executed. If the power is turned off while the action is running this 

causes incomplete storage. After the device starts up again the fault "*ConfigStartERROR 

parameters lost" appears on the display. Approx. 1000 storage procedures are possible per 

Paramodul. When this limit has almost been reached, result 14 is indicated after the storage 

procedure. When this happens, replace Paramodul as soon as possible. 

0: error free; 

10: write error; 

11: invalid data; 


14: warning; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 00 00 00 hex 

A00.1 

Process: Shows the progress of the "save vales" action in %. 

2000h 

1h 

Global 

read (0) 



11: invalid data; 


14: warning; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 00 00 01 hex 

A00.2 

Result: Result of the "save values" action 

2000h 

2h 

Global 

read (0) 

0: error free 

10: write error while opening a file: No Paramodul is installed or Paramodul is full or is damaged. 

11: The inverter's configuration memory area that is to be saved is not written 

12: write error while write-accessing Paramodul. Paramodul was removed, is full or is damaged. 

14: Warning. Paramodul has already been write-accessed many times. The memory chip is 

reaching the end of its ability to be write-accessed without errors. Error-free saving is still 

possible. Replace the Paramodul as soon as possible! 


A09.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

System reset & start: A reset of the microprocessor in the inverter is triggered if the parameter 

is activated. A restart occurs as it does after switching off/on the control part supply (device version 

/L: 24 V, device version /H: power supply). 


2009h 

0h 

A09.1 

Global 

Progress: displays the progress of the action System Reset in %. As the action causes a restart 

of the control part, no action progress can be observed. The value is always 0 %. 

2009h 

1h 

read (3) 


ID 441727.02 23



04 


A.. Inverter 


A09.2 

Global 

read (3) 

Result: Result of action System Reset. As the action causes a restart of the control part, no action 

result can be calculated. The value is always 0:error free. 


2009h 2h 

A10.0 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the "Display" 

communication path. Each parameter has one level for read or write accesses. A parameter can 

only be read or changed with the necessary access level. 

The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. 

200Ah 

Array 

0h 

Possible settings: 

0: Monitor; The elementary indicators can be monitored. General parameters can be changed. 

1: Standard; The primary parameters of the selected application can be monitored and changed. 

2: Extended; All parameters for commissioning and optimization of the selected application can be 

monitored and changed. 

3: Service; Service parameters. Permit a comprehensive diagnosis. 

Value range: -32768 ... 1 ... 32767 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 02 80 00 hex 

A10.1 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the RS232 (X3) 

communication path. Each parameter has one level each for read or write accesses. A parameter 

can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. 


200Ah 

Array 

1h 







Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767 


A10.2 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the CAN-bus (SDO) 




200Ah 

Array 

2h 







Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767 


ID 441727.02 24



04 


A.. Inverter 


A10.3 Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the PROFIBUS 

200Ah 3h 

Global 

communication path with the PKW0 or PKW1 protocol. Each parameter has one level each for read 

or write accesses. A parameter can only be read or changed with the necessary access level. 

r=0, w=0 The higher the set level the more parameters can be accessed. 

Array 







Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767 


A10.4 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

Userlevel: Specifies the access level of the user for the parameters via the "system bus" 




200Ah 

Array 

4h 







Value range: -32768 ... 3 ... 32767 


A11.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

Edited Axe: Specifies the axis to be edited via device display. Axis to be edited (A11) and active 

axis (operating indicator, E84) must not be identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter 

continues with axis 2). 

0: axis 1; 

1: axis 2; 

2: axis 3; 

3: axis 4; 

200Bh 

Array 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 02 C0 00 hex 

A11.1 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

Edited Axe: Selects the axis to be parameterized which is addressed with CANopen ® with SDO 

channel 1 or with PROFIBUS DP-V0. The axis to be edited (A11) and the active axis (operation 

indicator, E84) must not be identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter continues with 

axis 2). With PROFIBUS DP-V0, a distinction can be made between two axes with the PKW 

service. Axis 1 or axis 2 is selected with A11.1 = 0. Axis 3 or axis 4 is selected with A11.1 = 1. 

0: axis 1; 

1: axis 2; 

2: axis 3; 

3: axis 4; 

200Bh 

Array 

1h 


ID 441727.02 25



04 


A.. Inverter 


A11.2 Edited Axe: Selects the axis to be parameterized which is addressed with CANopen ® with SDO 200Bh 2h 

Global 

channel 2. The axis to be edited (A11) and the active axis (operation indicator, E84) must not be 

identical (e.g., axis 1 can be edited while the inverter continues with axis 2). 

r=1, w=1 

0: axis 1; 

Array 

1: axis 2; 

2: axis 3; 

3: axis 4; 


A11.3 

Global 

r=1, w=1 




0: axis 1; 

1: axis 2; 

2: axis 3; 

3: axis 4; 

200Bh 

Array 

3h 


A11.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 




0: axis 1; 

1: axis 2; 

2: axis 3; 

3: axis 4; 

200Bh 

Array 

4h 


A12 

Language: Language on the display. 

200Ch 

0h 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

0: German; 

1: English; 

2: French; 


A21 

Brake resistor R: Resistance value of the brake resistor being used. 

2015h 

0h 

Global, OFF 

Value range in Ohm: 100.0 ... 100,0 ... 600.0 

r=1, w=2 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Ohm; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 05 40 00 hex 

A22 

Global, OFF 

r=1, w=2 

Brake resistor P: Power of the brake resistor used. A22 = 0 means the brake chopper is 

deactivated. Only values in 10 W increments can be entered. 

Value range in W: 0 ... 600 ... 6400 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1W; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=10·W); USS-Adr: 01 05 80 00 hex 

2016h 

0h 

A23 

Brake resistor thermal: Thermal time constant of the brake resistor. 

2017h 

0h 

Global, OFF 

Value range in s: 1 ... 40 ... 2000 

r=1, w=2 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 05 C0 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 26



04 


A.. Inverter 


A29 Fault quick-stop: If the parameter is inactive, the power section is turned off when a fault 

201Dh 0h 

Global 

occurs. The motor coasts down. If the parameter is active, a quick stop is executed when a fault 

occurs if the event permits (see event list). When the enable signal is LOW during a fault quick 

r=2, w=2 stop, the quick stop is interrupted and the motor coasts down. This also applies when A44 enable 

quick-stop is active. 

0: inactive; Coast down (disable power section immediately). 

1: active; Execute quick stop. 


A34 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Auto-start: When A34 = 1 is set, the device state "switch-on disable" to "ready for switch-on" is 

exited both during first startup and after a fault reset although the enable is active. With fault reset 

via enable, this causes an immediately restart! A34 is only supported with standard device state 

machines and not with DSP402 device state machine. 

2022h 

0h 

WARNING 

Before activation of auto-start with A34 = 1, check to determine whether an automatic restart is 

allowed (for safety reasons). Only use auto-start under consideration of the standards and 

regulations which are applicable to the plant or machine. 

0: inactive; After power on, a change of the enable from L-level to H-level is necessary to enable 

the drive (→ message "1:switch-on disable"). This prevents an undesired startup of the motor 

(machine safety). 

1: active; If auto-start is active, the drive can start running immediately after power on and existing 

enable. 


A35 

Global, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

Low voltage limit: When the inverter is enabled and the DC link voltage goes lower than the 

value set here, the inverter triggers the indication of the event "46:Low voltage." A35 should be 

approximately 85 % of the applied power voltage so that the possible failure of a network phase is 

absorbed. 

Value range in V: 180.0 ... 350,0 ... 570.0 

2023h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 08 C0 00 hex 

A36 

Global, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

Mains voltage: Maximum voltage which the inverter provides to the motor. Usually the power 

(mains) voltage. Starting with this voltage, the motor runs in the weak field range. 

Value range in V: 220 ... 400 ... 480 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2317 V); USS-Adr: 01 09 00 00 hex 

2024h 

0h 

A37.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Reset memorized values & start: The six different memorized values E33 to E38 (max. 

current, max. temperature, and so on) are reset. 



2025h 

0h 

A37.1 

Process: Progress of the reset-memorized-values action in %. 

2025h 

1h 

Global 


read (2) 


ID 441727.02 27



04 


A.. Inverter 


A37.2 

Global 

Result: After conclusion of the reset-memorized-values action, the result can be queried here. 


2025h 2h 

read (2) 


A38 

DC power-input: This parameter is effective for the following inverters: 

2026h 

0h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

• SDS 5000 

• SDS 5000A 

• MDS 5000A 

• FDS 5000A 

With this parameter you set whether the inverter is only supplied via the intermediate circuit with 

direct voltage. Also observe the DC-link connection section in the projecting manuals SDS 5000 (ID 

442277), MDS 5000 (ID 442273) and FDS 5000 (ID 442269). 

Groups 2 and 3 are exclusively powered via the DC link. Set A38 = 1:active for these inverters. Set 

A38 = 1:inactive for group 1 inverters. If you do not set a DC link coupling at all, always set 

parameter A38 to 0:inactive. 

0: inactive; Inverter is powered by the three-phase network. 

1: active; Inverter is powered with direct current exclusively via the terminals U+ and U- (size 0 to 

size 2) or ZK+ and ZK- (MDS size 3). 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 09 80 00 hex 

A39 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

t-max. quickstop: Maximum time available to a quick stop during enable=LOW or in the device 

state "fault reaction active." After this time expires, the motor is de-energized (A900 = low). This 

switch-off also occurs even when the quick stop has not yet been concluded. 

Value range in ms: 0 ... 400 ... 32767 

2027h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 09 C0 00 hex 

A41 

Global 

read (1) 

Axis-selector: Indicates the selected axis. 

The selected axis does not have to be the active axis. 

0: Axis 1; 

1: Axis 2; 

2: Axis 3; 

3: Axis 4; 

4: inactive; The last selected axis was axis 1. 




2029h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0A 40 00 hex 

A43 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Enable off delay: For suppression of short low-pulses on the X1.Enable. This finction is required 

for the connection of safety devices which use OSSD pulses for the diagnosis of switching 

cabability. 

WARNING 

The delay time is set always causes an A43-delayed reaction to the switch-off of the X1.Enable. 

This Time must be considered when a stopping distance is calculated. 

202Bh 

0h 

Value range in ms: 0.0 ... 0,0 ... 10.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 32.8 ms); USS-Adr: 01 0A C0 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 28



04 


A.. Inverter 


A44 

Global 

Enable quick-stop: If the parameter is inactive, the power pack is turned off immediately when 

enable = LOW. The motor coasts down. When A44 is active, a quick stop is executed when enable 

= LOW. 

202Ch 0h 

r=2, w=3 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0B 00 00 hex 

A45 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Quickstop end: When this parameter is set to "0:Standstill," the quick stop ends with standstill. 

With the setting "1:no stop," the quick stop ends when the quick stop request is deleted. 

0: standstill; 

1: no stop; 

202Dh 

0h 


A51 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Local reference value: When local mode has been activated with the Hand key of the operator 

panel, the local reference value A51 is used for tipping (inching) (arrow key ">" ref. value = +A51, 

arrow key "



04 


A.. Inverter 


4: BE1-inverted; 

5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0F 00 00 hex 

A61 

Global, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Fault reset source: The fault reset signal triggers a fault reset. If the inverter has a malfunction, 

a change from LOW to HIGH resets this fault. The fault reset is not possible as long as A00 Save 

values is active or the cause of the fault still exists. Remember that not every fault can be 

acknowledged. 

The A61 parameter specifies where the fault reset signal comes from. With "0:Low" and "1:High," a 

fault reset is only possible with the key at the device operator panel or with a LOW-HIGH- 

LOW change of the enable. With A61 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, faults can be reset via the 

selected binary input. 

With A61 = 2:Parameter, the signal comes from bit 1 of parameter A180 Device Command Byte 

(global parameter). 

203Dh 

0h 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 

ID 441727.02 30



04 


A.. Inverter 



19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 



A62 

Global, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Quick stop source: The quick stop signal triggers a quick stop of the drive. With positioning 

mode, the acceleration specified in I17 determines the braking time. When the axis is in speed 

mode, the D81 parameter determines the braking time. (See also A45.) 

The A62 parameter specifies where the signal is coming from which causes the quick stop. "0:Low" 

means that no quick stop is executed. "1:High" means that the drive is permanently in quick stop 

mode. With A62 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the quick stop is triggered by the selected binary 

input. With A62 = 2:Parameter, A180 bit 2 is used as the signal source (global parameter). 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 



203Eh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 31



04 


A.. Inverter 


A63 Axis selector 0 source: There are 2 "axis selector 0/1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 203Fh 0h 

Global, OFF 

axes are selected in binary coding. The A63 parameter specifies where bit 0 for the axis selection is 

coming from. The possible selections "0:Low" and "1:High" are the same as fixed values. With A63 

r=1, w=1 = 0:Low, the bit is set permanently to 0. With A63 = 1:High, it is permanently set to 1. With A63 = 

3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the axis selection can be made via the selected binary input. With A63 

= 2:Parameter, A180, bit 3 is used as the signal source (global parameter). 

NOTE 

- Axis switchover is not possible unless the enable is off and E48 device control state is not 5:fault. 

- With the FDS 5000, the axes can only be used as parameter records for a motor. The 

POSISwitch ® AX 5000 option cannot be connected. 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 0F C0 00 hex 

A64 

Global, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Axis selector 1 source: There are 2 "axis selector 0/1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 

axes are selected in binary coding. The A64 parameter specifies where bit 0 for the axis selection is 

coming from. The possible selections "0:Low" and "1:High" are the same as fixed values. With A64 

= 0:Low, the bit is set permanently to 0. With A64 = 1:High, it is permanently set to 1. With A64 = 

3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, the axis selection can be made via the selected binary input. With A64 

= 2:Parameter, A180, bit 4 is used as the signal source (global parameter). 

2040h 

0h 

NOTE 




0: Low; 

1: High; 

ID 441727.02 32



04 


A.. Inverter 


2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 


A65 

Global, OFF 

r=1, w=1 


Axis disable source: The axis-disable signal deactivates all axes. The A65 parameter specifies 

where the signal comes from. With A65 = 3:BE1 ... 28:BE13-inverted, axis selection can be handled 

with the selected binary input. 

With A65 = 2:Parameter, A180, bit 5 is the signal source (global parameter). 

NOTE 




0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 

2041h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 33



04 


A.. Inverter 



19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 


A80 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A81 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


Serial address: Specifies the address of the inverter for serial communication via X3 with 

POSITool or another USS master. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 31 


Serial baudrate: Specifies the baud rate for serial communication via the X3 interface. Starting 

with V 5.1, writing to A81 no longer changes the baud rate immediately but now not until after 

device OFF-ON (previously with A00 save values) or A87 activate serial baud rate = 1 (activate 

baud rate). 

This makes the reaction identical to that of the fieldbuses. 

0: 9600 Baud; 

1: 19200 Baud; 

2: 38400 Baud; 

3: 57600 Baud; 

4: 115200 Baud; 


2050h 

2051h 

0h 

0h 

A82 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

CAN baudrate: Setting of the baud rate with which the CAN-Bus will be operated. Cf. operating 

manual CAN, ID 441686. 

0: 10 kBit/s; 

1: 20 kBit/s; 

2: 50 kBit/s; 

3: 100 kBit/s; 

4: 125 kBit/s; 

5: 250 kBit/s; 

6: 500 kBit/s; 

7: 800 kBit/s; 

8: 1000 kBit/s; 

2052h 

0h 


Only visible when the CAN 5000 option is installed or when CAN 5000 was selected as option 

module 1 in the device configuration. 

A83 

Global 

r=0, w=0 

Busaddress: Specifies the device address for operation with fieldbus. A83 has no effect on 

communication via X3 with POSITool or another USS master. 

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 125 


2053h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 34



04 


A.. Inverter 


A84 

Global 

PROFIBUS baudrate: When operated with a device of the 5th generation of STÖBER inverters 

with option board "PROFIBUS DP," the baud rate found on the bus is indicated. Cf. operating 

manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687. 

2054h 0h 

read (0) 

A85 

Global 

read (3) 

0: Not found; 

1: 9.6kBit/s; 

2: 19.2kBit/s; 

3: 45.45kBit/s; 

4: 93.75kBit/s; 

5: 187.5kBit/s; 

6: 500 kBit/s; 

7: 1500kBit/s; 

8: 3000kBit/s; 

9: 6000kBit/s; 

10: 12000kBit/s; 


Only visible when a PROFIBUS device controller is selected in the device configuration or the 

appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming. 

PROFIBUS diagnostic: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the PROFIBUS 

DP interface. See operating manual PROFIBUS DP, ID 441687. 

Bit Name Meaning for bit = 1 

0 Shutdown fail Problem when shutting down the 

PROFIBUS driver software. 

1 Data exchange PROFIBUS is in the cyclic data 

exchange state with this subscriber. 

2 Wait for Param Subscriber waits to be configured by 

the PROFIBUS master. 

3 Bus failure Fault in PROFIBUS 

4 Acyc. initiate 1 An acyclic connection is established. 

5 Acyc. initiate 2 A second acyclic connection is 

established. 

6 MDS configured Subscriber is configured by PROFIBUS 

master. 

7 Driver error Fault in PROFIBUS driver software. 

8 Application ready Inverter firmware is ready for 

connection to PROFIBUS. 

9 LED red on The red LED of the DP 5000 lights up. 

10 LED green on The green LED of the DP 5000 lights up. 




2055h 

0h 

A86 

Global 

read (1) 

PROFIBUS configuration: The inverter offers various ways (PPO types) to transfer cyclic user 

data via PROFIBUS DP. These can be configured in the GSD file STOE5005.gsd on the controller 

(bus master). This indication parameter can be used to check which of the possible configurations 

was chosen. 

0: No data communication via PROFIBUS started 

1: PPO1: 4 PKW, 2 PZD 




2056h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 35



04 


A.. Inverter 


5: PPO5: 4 PKW, 10 PZD 

6: PPO2: 4 PKW, 6 PZD consis. 2 W 






A87 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Activate serial baudrate: Starting with V 5.1, writing in A81 no longer changes the baud rate 

immediately. The change now takes place only after device OFF/ON (previously with A00 save 

values) or A87 = 1 (activate baud rate). This makes the reaction the same as the reaction of the 

fieldbuses. 

2057h 

0h 


A90.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

PZD Setpoint Mapping Rx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 

imaged first from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 

Value range: A00 ... D230 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text) 

205Ah 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 16 80 00 hex 

A90.1 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged second from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 

Value range: A00 ... C230 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text) 

205Ah 

1h 


A90.2 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged third from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 

Value range: A00 ... A180 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text) 

205Ah 

2h 


A90.3 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged fourth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 


205Ah 

3h 

A90.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged fifth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 


205Ah 

4h 

A90.5 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged sixth from the contents of the process data channel (receiving direction as seen by the 

inverter). 


205Ah 

5h 

ID 441727.02 36



04 


A.. Inverter 


A91.0 

Global 

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 1. mapped Parameter: If more parameters are to be imaged 

than can be specified in A90, this parameter offers a possible extension. See A90.0. 

205Bh 0h 

r=3, w=3 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 16 C0 00 hex 

A91.1 

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 2. mapped Parameter: For extension of A90, see A90.1. 

205Bh 

1h 

Global 


r=3, w=3 

A91.2 

PZD Setpoint Mapping 2Rx 3. mapped Parameter: For extension of A90, See A90.2. 

205Bh 

2h 

Global 


r=3, w=3 

A91.3 


205Bh 

3h 

Global 

r=3, w=3 


A91.4 


205Bh 

4h 

Global 


r=3, w=3 

A91.5 


205Bh 

5h 

Global 

r=3, w=3 


A93 

Global 

read (1) 

PZD Setpoint Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the expected 

process data with reference values (data from PROFIBUS master to inverter) for the current 

parameterization. 




205Dh 

0h 

A94.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 

imaged first in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

Value range: A00 ... E100 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text) 


205Eh 

0h 

A94.1 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged second in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the 

inverter). 


205Eh 

1h 


A94.2 

Global 

r=1, w=1 


imaged third in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 



205Eh 

2h 

ID 441727.02 37



04 


A.. Inverter 


A94.3 PZD ActValue Mapping Tx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 205Eh 3h 

Global 

imaged fourth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the 

inverter). 

r=1, w=1 


A94.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A94.5 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A95.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A95.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A95.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A95.3 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A95.4 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A95.5 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A97 

Global 

read (1) 



imaged fifth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 



imaged sixth in the contents of the process data channel (sending direction as seen by the 

inverter). 


PZD ActValue Mapping 2Tx 1. mapped Parameter: When more parameters are to be 

imaged than can be specified in A94, this parameter offers a possible extension. See A94.0. 


PZD ActValue Mapping 2Tx 2. mapped Parameter: For extension of A94, see A94.1. 










PZD ActValue Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the current 

process data with actual values (data from inverter to PROFIBUS master) for the current 

parameterization. 




205Eh 

205Eh 

205Fh 

205Fh 

205Fh 

205Fh 

205Fh 

205Fh 

2061h 

4h 

5h 

0h 

1h 

2h 

3h 

4h 

5h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 38



04 


A.. Inverter 


A98 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

DP time stamp mode: Currently has no function 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 5 




2062h 0h 

A100 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Fieldbusscaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers 

for the representation/scaling of process data values during transmission via PZD channel. 

Regardless of this setting, the representation is always the whole number via PKW channel and the 

non cyclic parameter channel. 

2064h 

0h 

CAUTION 

When "0:integer" is parameterized (scaled values), the runtime load increases significantly and it 

may become necessary to increase A150 cycle time to avoid the fault "57:runtime usage" or 

"35:Watchdog." 

With few exceptions, the PKW channel is always transferred in scaled format. 

0: integer without point; Values are transferred as whole number in user units * 10 to the power of 

the number of positions after the decimal point. 

1: native; Values are transferred at optimized speed in the internal inverter raw format (e.g., 

increments). 




A101 

Global 

Dummy-Byte: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the byte length when 

you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. 

2065h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

NOTE 

The parameter is only visible when fieldbus device control was selected in the configuration 

assistant. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 19 40 00 hex 

A102 

Global 

Dummy-Word: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the word length when 

you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. 

2066h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

NOTE 


assistant. 


A103 

Global 

Dummy-Doubleword: This variable is used to replace a piece of process data with the doubleword 

length when you want to test deactivation of the process variables via fieldbus. 

2067h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

NOTE 


assistant. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 19 C0 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 39



04 


A.. Inverter 


A109 PZD-Timeout: To keep the inverter from continuing with the last received reference values after a 206Dh 0h 

Global 

failure of PROFIBUS or the PROFIBUS master, process data monitoring should be activated. The 

RX block monitors the regular receipt of process data telegrams (PZD) which the PROFIBUS 

r=1, w=1 master sends cyclically during normal operation. The A109 PZD-Timeout parameter is used to 

activate this monitoring function. A time is set here in milliseconds. The default setting is 200 msec. 

The values 65535 and 0 mean that monitoring is inactive This is recommended while the inverter is 

being commissioned on PROFIBUS and for service and maintenance work. 

Monitoring should only be activated for the running process during which a bus master cyclically 

sends process data to the inverter. The monitoring time must be adapted to the maximum total 

cycle time on PROFIBUS plus a sufficient reserve for possible delays on the bus. Sensible values 

are usually between 30 and 300 msec. 

When process data monitoring is triggered on the inverter, the fault "52:communication" is 

triggered. 

* The A109 PZD-Timeout parameter is also used for communication via USS protocol for the USS- 

PZD telegram. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 1B 40 00 hex 

A110.0 

Global 

USS PZD Mapping Rx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged 

first from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

206Eh 

0h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 

The parameter is only visible when a USS device controller is selected in the device configuration 

or the appropriate blocks were used with the option for free, graphic programming. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1B 80 00 hex 

A110.1 

Global 


second from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

206Eh 

1h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 





A110.2 

Global 


third from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

206Eh 

2h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 





A110.3 

Global 


fourth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

206Eh 

3h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 




ID 441727.02 40



04 


A.. Inverter 


A110.4 USS PZD Mapping Rx 5. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged 206Eh 4h 

Global 

fifth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 




A110.5 

Global 


sixth from the contents of the process data telegram (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

206Eh 

5h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 




A113 

Global 

USS PZD Rx Len: Indicator parameter which shows the length in bytes of the expected process 

data telegram with reference values of USS master for the current parameterization. 

2071h 

0h 

read (1) 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1C 40 00 hex 

A114.0 

Global 

USS PZD Mapping Tx 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged 

first in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

2072h 

0h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1C 80 00 hex 

A114.1 

Global 


second in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

2072h 

1h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 





A114.2 

Global 


third in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

2072h 

2h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 





ID 441727.02 41



04 


A.. Inverter 


A114.3 USS PZD Mapping Tx 4. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is imaged 2072h 3h 

Global 

fourth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

r=1, w=1 

A114.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 






fifth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

NOTE 




2072h 

4h 

A114.5 

Global 


sixth in the contents of the process data telegram (sending direction as seen by the inverter). 

2072h 

5h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 




A117 

Global 

USS PZD Tx Len: Indicator parameter which indicates the length in bytes of the process data 

telegram to be sent with actual values to the USS master for the current parameterization. 

2075h 

0h 

read (1) 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1D 40 00 hex 

A118 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

USS PZD scaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers 

for the representation/scaling of parameter values during transmission via the process data 

telegram. Regardless of this setting, the representation can be selected separately via the readparameter 

or write-parameter services. 

2076h 

0h 

NOTE 



0: integer without point; Values are transferred as whole number in user units * number of positions 

after the decimal point to the 10th power. 

1: native; Values are transferred in the internal inverter raw format (e.g., increments). 


ID 441727.02 42



04 


A.. Inverter 


A120 IGB Address: The IGB address of the device is entered in this parameter. Since up to 32 

2078h 0h 

Global 

inverters can be connected to one IGB network, enter a value between 0 and 31 in this parameter. 

Remember that each IGB address can only be allocated once within an IGB network if you want to 

r=3, w=3 utilize the functionality of the IGB Motionbus. This is why you should use the IGB Motionbus 

Configuration assistant to set this parameter. Remember that the parameter does not exist unless 

you activate the IGB Motionbus function in step 6 of the configuration assistant. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 31 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 1E 00 00 hex 

A121 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A124 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A126.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IGB nominal number: The number of stations expected by the IGB Motionbus is entered in this 

parameter. 

If you plan to utilize the IGB Motionbus function, the parameter must be the same for all stations 

and must be set to the expected number of stations so that the state A155 = 3:IGB Motionbus is 

achieved. If the parameter is set to 0 or 1, the IGB Motionbus cannot be used. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 32 


IGB exceptional motion: When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the device 

state machine cannot exit the state 1:switch on inhibit (see E48 device state) if the IGB Motionbus 

cannot be established (A155 IGB-state does not indicate 3:IGB Motionbus). 

You can activate IGB exceptional motion in A124 so that the axes can still be individually positioned 

during commissioning and failure of the IGB or the device. When IGB exceptional motion is 

activated, enabling is possible regardless of A155 IGB-state. 

Warning 

When A124 is activated, non-synchronous, undefined movements are possible which can endanger 

personnel and machines. When you use A124, make sure that the movements cannot injure 

personnel or cause property damage. 

Information 

This parameter cannot be saved. It is preset with 0:inactive each time the device boots. 

0: inactive; Normal operation. When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the device 

state 1:switch on inhibit can only be exited if the IGB Motionbus can be established (A155 IGBstate 

indicates 3:IGB Motionbus). 

1: active; IGB exceptional motion. When an SDS 5000 is a station on the IGB Motionbus, the 

device state machine can also exit the state 1:switch on inhibit via the IGB exceptional motion 

(see E48 device state) if the IGB Motionbus cannot be established (A155 IGB-state does not 

indicate 3:IGB Motionbus). This may be necessary during maintenance, for example, when not 

all the inverters for the IGB Motionbus are located at the same place. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 1F 00 00 hex 

IGB Producer Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send 

("produce") up to six selectable, PDO-capable parameters on the IGB Motionbus. These 

parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The first parameter which is 

sent on the bus is entered in A126.0. 

Remember that each device can send a maximum of 32 bytes. The first 6 bytes are permanently 

assigned: 

- Byte 0: E48 device control state 

- Byte 1: E80 operating condition 

- Byte 2: E82 event type 

- Byte 3: A163.0 IGB systembits element 0 


- Byte 5: reserved 

The parameters entered in A126.x are transmitted in succession, without gaps and with element 0, 

beginning with byte 6. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 00 hex 

2079h 

207Ch 

207Eh 

Array 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 43



04 


A.. Inverter 


A126.1 IGB Producer Mapping 2. mapped Parameter: Every SDS 5000 can cyclically send 

Global 


parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The second parameter 

r=3, w=3 which is sent on the bus is entered in A126.1. 


assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

1h 


A126.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 



parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The third parameter which 

is sent on the bus is entered in A126.2. 


assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

2h 


A126.3 

Global 

r=3, w=3 



parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The 4th parameter which is 



assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

3h 


ID 441727.02 44



04 


A.. Inverter 



Global 



r=3, w=3 sent on the bus is entered in A126.4. 


assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

4h 


A126.5 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

5h 


A126.6 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

6h 


ID 441727.02 45



04 


A.. Inverter 



Global 



r=3, w=3 sent on the bus is entered in A126.7. 


assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

7h 


A126.8 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

8h 


A126.9 

Global 

r=3, w=3 



parameters are entered in the elements of the array parameter A126.x. The 10th parameter which 



assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

9h 


ID 441727.02 46



04 


A.. Inverter 


A126. 

10 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0A hex 

207Eh 

Array 

000 

Ah 

A126. 

11 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

000 

Bh 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0B hex 

A126. 

12 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

000 

Ch 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0C hex 

A126. 

13 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






207Eh 

Array 

000 

Dh 

ID 441727.02 47



04 


A.. Inverter 


assigned: 









Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0D hex 

A126. 

14 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

000 

Eh 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0E hex 

A126. 

15 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

000 

Fh 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 1F 80 0F hex 

A126. 

16 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 






207Eh 

Array 

10h 

ID 441727.02 48



04 


A.. Inverter 






A126. 

17 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

11h 


A126. 

18 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

12h 


A126. 

19 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

13h 


ID 441727.02 49



04 


A.. Inverter 


A126. 

20 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 










207Eh 

Array 

14h 

A126. 

21 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

15h 


A126. 

22 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






assigned: 









207Eh 

Array 

16h 


A126. 

23 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






207Eh 

Array 

17h 

ID 441727.02 50



04 


A.. Inverter 


assigned: 










A128.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IGB Consumer Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable 

values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 

1. The source address (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent data 

are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 

2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A128.x. At the 

same time, this also allows you to specify how many bytes will be read. 

2080h 

Array 

0h 

In A128.0 enter the parameter to which the first value is to be written. The length of the parameter 

determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.0. Remember 

that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic. 


A128.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

1h 

In A128.1 enter the parameter to which the second value is to be written. The length of the 

parameter determines how many bytes are to be read starting at the address specified in A129.1. 

Remember that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping characteristic. 


A128.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

2h 

In A128.2 enter the parameter to which the third value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




ID 441727.02 51



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128.3 IGB Consumer Mapping 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable 

Global 



r=3, w=3 are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 



2080h 

Array 

3h 

In A128.3 enter the parameter to which the fourth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A128.4 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

4h 

In A128.4 enter the parameter to which the fifth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A128.5 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

5h 

In A128.5 enter the parameter to which the sixth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A128.6 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

6h 

In A128.6 enter the parameter to which the 7th value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




ID 441727.02 52



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128.7 IGB Consumer Mapping 8. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six selectable 

Global 






2080h 

Array 

7h 





A128.8 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

8h 





A128.9 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IGB Consumer Mapping 10. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six 

selectable values from the IGB Motionbus. To do this, you must make the following entries: 





2080h 

Array 

9h 





A128. 

10 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

000 

Ah 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0A hex 

ID 441727.02 53



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

11 

Global 

r=3, w=3 










Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0B hex 

2080h 

Array 

000 

Bh 

A128. 

12 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

000 

Ch 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0C hex 

A128. 

13 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

000 

Dh 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0D hex 

A128. 

14 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

000 

Eh 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0E hex 

ID 441727.02 54



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

15 

Global 

r=3, w=3 










Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 20 00 0F hex 

2080h 

Array 

000 

Fh 

A128. 

16 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

10h 





A128. 

17 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

11h 





A128. 

18 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

12h 





ID 441727.02 55



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

19 

Global 

r=3, w=3 











2080h 

Array 

13h 

A128. 

20 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

14h 

In A128.20 enter the parameter to which the 21st value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A128. 

21 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

15h 

In A128.21 enter the parameter to which the 22nd value is to be written. The length of the 




A128. 

22 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

16h 

In A128.22 enter the parameter to which the 23rd value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




ID 441727.02 56



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

23 

Global 

r=3, w=3 











2080h 

Array 

17h 

A128. 

24 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

18h 





A128. 

25 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

19h 





A128. 

26 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

001 

Ah 





ID 441727.02 57



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

27 

Global 

r=3, w=3 











2080h 

Array 

001 

Bh 

A128. 

28 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

001 

Ch 





A128. 

29 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

001 

Dh 





A128. 

30 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2080h 

Array 

001 

Eh 





ID 441727.02 58



04 


A.. Inverter 


A128. 

31 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A129.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A129.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A129.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 











IGB Consumer Quelladresse 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six 


1. The source address (i.e., (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent 

data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 



Enter the source address as a four-position value in A129.x. The first digits are the IGB address of 

the inverter which is supposed to be read. The two last digits represent the number of the byte 

starting at which the read access is to begin. If you want to read from the inverter with the IGB 

address 11 starting at byte 5, you would enter the value 1105 in A129.x. 

Enter the first source address in A129.0. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 00 hex 



1. The source address (i.e., (i.e., the inverter which sent the data and starting at what byte the sent 

data are to be read). Enter this information in A129.x. 







Enter the second source address in A129.1. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 












Enter the third source address in A129.2. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


2080h 

Array 

2081h 

Array 

2081h 

Array 

2081h 

Array 

001 

Fh 

0h 

1h 

2h 

ID 441727.02 59



04 


A.. Inverter 


A129.3 IGB Consumer Quelladresse 4. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to six 

Global 






2081h 

Array 

3h 





Enter the fourth source address in A129.3. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129.4 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

4h 





Enter the fifth source address in A129.4. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129.5 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

5h 





Enter the sixth source address in A129.5. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129.6 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

6h 

ID 441727.02 60



04 


A.. Inverter 






Enter the 7th source address in A129.6. 

A129.7 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 








2081h 

Array 

7h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129.8 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

8h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129.9 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

9h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 61



04 


A.. Inverter 


A129. 

10 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Ah 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0A hex 

A129. 

11 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Bh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0B hex 

A129. 

12 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Ch 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0C hex 

A129. 

13 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Dh 

ID 441727.02 62



04 


A.. Inverter 







Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0D hex 

A129. 

14 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Eh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0E hex 

A129. 

15 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

000 

Fh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 0F hex 

A129. 

16 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

10h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 63



04 


A.. Inverter 


A129. 

17 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

11h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

18 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

12h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

19 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

13h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

20 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

14h 

ID 441727.02 64



04 


A.. Inverter 






Enter the 21rd source address in A129.20. 

A129. 

21 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 








2081h 

Array 

15h 





Enter the 22nd source address in A129.21. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

22 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

16h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

23 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

17h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 65



04 


A.. Inverter 


A129. 

24 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

18h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

25 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

19h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A129. 

26 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Ah 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1A hex 

A129. 

27 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Bh 

ID 441727.02 66



04 


A.. Inverter 







Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1B hex 

A129. 

28 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Ch 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1C hex 

A129. 

29 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Dh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1D hex 

A129. 

30 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Eh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1E hex 

ID 441727.02 67



04 


A.. Inverter 


A129. 

31 

Global 

r=3, w=3 







2081h 

Array 

001 

Fh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 40 1F hex 

A130.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IGB Consumer2 Mapping 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 

selectable values from the IGB Motionbus with the second consumer channel (IGB Motionbus 

Consumer2 Map block). 

To do this, you must make the following entries: 



2. The target address (i.e., where the value is to be written). Enter this information in A130.x an. the 


2082h 

Array 

0h 

In A130.0, enter the parameter to which the first value is to be written. The length of the parameter 


that you can only use parameters with the PDO-Mapping attribute. 


A130.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

1h 

In A130.1 enter the parameter to which the second value is to be written. The length of the 




A130.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 








2082h 

Array 

2h 

ID 441727.02 68



04 


A.. Inverter 



In A130.2 enter the parameter to which the third value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A130.3 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

3h 

In A130.3 enter the parameter to which the fourth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A130.4 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

4h 

In A130.4 enter the parameter to which the fifth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A130.5 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

5h 

In A130.5 enter the parameter to which the sixth value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




ID 441727.02 69



04 


A.. Inverter 


A130.6 IGB Consumer2 Mapping 7. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 

2082h 6h 

Global 



Array 

r=3, w=3 










A130.7 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

7h 





A130.8 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

8h 

In A130.8 enter the parameter to which the 9. value is to be written. The length of the parameter 




A130.9 

Global 

r=3, w=3 








2082h 

Array 

9h 

ID 441727.02 70



04 


A.. Inverter 







A130. 

10 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

000 

Ah 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

11 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

000 

Bh 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

12 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

000 

Ch 

r=3, w=3 










ID 441727.02 71



04 


A.. Inverter 


A130. 

13 

Global 

r=3, w=3 













2082h 

Array 

000 

Dh 

A130. 

14 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

000 

Eh 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

15 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

000 

Fh 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

16 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

10h 

r=3, w=3 





ID 441727.02 72



04 


A.. Inverter 







A130. 

17 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

11h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

18 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

12h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

19 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

13h 

r=3, w=3 










ID 441727.02 73



04 


A.. Inverter 


A130. 

20 

Global 

r=3, w=3 













2082h 

Array 

14h 

A130. 

21 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

15h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

22 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

16h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

23 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

17h 

r=3, w=3 





ID 441727.02 74



04 


A.. Inverter 







A130. 

24 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

18h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

25 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

19h 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

26 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

001 

Ah 

r=3, w=3 










ID 441727.02 75



04 


A.. Inverter 


A130. 

27 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2082h 

Array 

001 

Bh 





A130. 

28 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

001 

Ch 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

29 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

001 

Dh 

r=3, w=3 










A130. 

30 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

001 

Eh 

r=3, w=3 






ID 441727.02 76



04 


A.. Inverter 






A130. 

31 

Global 




2082h 

Array 

001 

Fh 

r=3, w=3 










A131.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 1. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 








2083h 

Array 

0h 





Enter the first source address in A131.0. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 00 hex 

A131.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

1h 





Enter the second source address in A131.1. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 77



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131.2 IGB Consumer2 Quelladresse 3. mapped Parameter: Each device can read up to 32 2083h 2h 

Global 



Array 

r=3, w=3 










Enter the third source address in A131.2. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131.3 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

3h 





Enter the fourth source address in A131.3. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131.4 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

4h 





Enter the fifth source address in A131.4. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 78



04 


A.. Inverter 



Global 



Array 

r=3, w=3 










Enter the sixth source address in A131.5. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131.6 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

6h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131.7 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

7h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 79



04 


A.. Inverter 



Global 



Array 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131.9 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

9h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

10 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

000 

Ah 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0A hex 

ID 441727.02 80



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

11 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

000 

Bh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0B hex 

A131. 

12 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

000 

Ch 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0C hex 

A131. 

13 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

000 

Dh 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0D hex 

ID 441727.02 81



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

14 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

000 

Eh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0E hex 

A131. 

15 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

000 

Fh 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 0F hex 

A131. 

16 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

10h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 82



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

17 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

11h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

18 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

12h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

19 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

13h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 83



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

20 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

14h 





Enter the 21st source address in A131.20. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

21 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

15h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

22 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

16h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 84



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

23 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

17h 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

24 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

18h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


A131. 

25 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

19h 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 


ID 441727.02 85



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

26 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

001 

Ah 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1A hex 

A131. 

27 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

001 

Bh 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1B hex 

A131. 

28 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

001 

Ch 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1C hex 

ID 441727.02 86



04 


A.. Inverter 


A131. 

29 

Global 

r=3, w=3 









2083h 

Array 

001 

Dh 






Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1D hex 

A131. 

30 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

001 

Eh 

r=3, w=3 










Enter the 31st source address in A131.30. 

Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1E hex 

A131. 

31 

Global 




2083h 

Array 

001 

Fh 

r=3, w=3 











Value range: 0 ... 6 ... 3131 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.25; USS-Adr: 01 20 C0 1F hex 

ID 441727.02 87



04 


A.. Inverter 


A138 IGB motionbus time: This parameter indicates the global time (in milliseconds) on the IGB- 208Ah 0h 

Global 

Motionbus. The value runs from 0 to 2 32 -1 = 4 294 967 295 ms and then starts again at 0. All 

stations of the IGB-Motionbus run synchronously to each other and use the common device clock. 

read (3) With the help of this parameter, you can trigger Scope imagines on different inverters, for example, 

and then arrange the pictures in POSITool by time. 

A140 

Global 

read (0) 

A141 

Global 

read (0) 

A142 

Global 

read (3) 

A144 

Global 

r=3, w=0 

A150 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=3 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 22 80 00 hex 

LCD line0: Indication as character string of the top display line. 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 01 23 00 00 hex 

LCD line1: Indication as character string of the bottom display line. 


Key code: Code of the effective key. 0=none, 1=LEFT, 2=RIGHT, 3=AB, 4=AUF, 5=#, 6=ESC, 

7=F1, 8=F2, 9=F3, 10=F4, 11=HAND, 12= EIN, 13=AUS, 14=I/O 


Remote key code: Key activations can be simulated by writing this parameter. For meaning, 

see A142. 


Cycle time: Cycle time of the real-time configuration on the axis. The load of the real-time task 

can be checked in parameter E191 runtime usage. When the computing load becomes too great, 

the event "57:runtime usage" is triggered. 

NOTE 

Changing this parameter may mean that a changed configuration is detected when you go online 

with POSITool. 

4: 1ms; 

5: 2ms; 

6: 4ms; 

7: 8ms; 

8: 16ms; 

9: 32ms; 


208Ch 

208Dh 

208Eh 

2090h 

2096h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

A151 

Global 

read (2) 

Session ID: The parameter indicates the current session ID which was assigned to the inverter 

by the Teleserver and the number which the person responsible for the machine gives the service 

employee (e.g., over the telephone). The service employee can only establish the remote service 

connection with the session ID if parameter A168 = 1:remote service with session ID is set. 

The entry 0 in A151 means that there is no session ID. 

2097h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 88



04 


A.. Inverter 


A152 IGB position: The parameter indicates the current position of the inverter in the IGB network. 2098h 0h 

Global 0: Single. The inverter is not connected with other SDS 5000s. 

1: IGB-internal. Both RJ45 sockets are connected with other inverters (i.e., additional SDS 5000s 

read (2) 

are connected on either side of the inverter). 

2: Gateway X3 A. The inverter is located on the outer left-hand end of the IGB (i.e., a valid inverter 

is not connected to its X3 A socket). 

3: Gateway X3 B. The inverter is located on the outer right-hand end of the IGB (i.e., a valid 

inverter is not connected to its X3 B socket) or more than 32 inverters are connected with each 

other. In this case, the IGB is logically terminated after the 32nd SDS 5000 and this status is 

indicated. 


A153 

Global 

read (2) 

IGB Actual Node Number: The parameter specifies the number of stations which are currently 

registered with the IGB. 

0: or 1: At this time no further station is connected with this inverter via IGB. 

2 to 32: Indicated number corresponds to the number of inverters found in the IGB network. 


2099h 

0h 

A154.0 

IGB Port X3 A State: The parameter indicates the status of the left-hand Ethernet socket X3 A. 

0: ERROR. The status of the socket is not known. 

1: NoConnection. The socket is not connected with other devices. 

2: 10 MBit/s. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 10 Mbit/s. The station is 

not an SDS 5000. 

3: 100 MBit/s. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. 

Communication to this station does not have full-duplex capability and the station is not an SDS 

5000. 

4: link OK. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s whose 

communication has full-duplex capability. 


209Ah 

0h 

Global 

read (2) 

Array 

A154.1 

Global 

read (2) 

IGB Port X3 B State: The parameter indicates the status of the right-hand Ethernet socket X3 

B. 

0: ERROR. The status of the socket is not known. 

1: NoConnection. The socket is not connected with other devices. 

2: 10 MBit/s. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 10 Mbit/s. The station is 

not an SDS 5000. 

3: 100 MBit/s. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. 

Communication to this station does not have full-duplex capability and the station is not an SDS 

5000. 

4: link OK. A connection exists to a station with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s whose 

communication has full-duplex capability. 

209Ah 

Array 

1h 


A155 

IGB-State: The parameter indicates the IGB status of the device. 

0: Booting. The IGB is booting. The connected inverters register themselves on the IGB network 

and synchronize themselves. 

1: Single. Currently there is no IGB network which is connected with other inverters. Either this 

SDS did not find another inverter with which an IGB network could be established, or an already 

existing connection to other inverters via IGB was disconnected. The functions Remote service 

or Direct link can be used. 

2: IGB-Running. Several inverters have established an IGB network. The functions Remote service 

or Direct link (with POSITool) can be used. The function IGB-Motionbus is not used or cannot be 

209Bh 

0h 

Global 

read (3) 

ID 441727.02 89



04 


A.. Inverter 


used for one of the following reasons: 

- because the function was not selected during configuration 

- because parameter A120 IGB Address was not set uniquely for all stations 

- because A121 IGB nominal number was not parameterized 

3: IGB-Motionbus; The IGB-Motionbus was established. This means that:: 

- The IGB-Motionbus function was activated on all inverters in the IGB network and 

- There was no multiple assignment of IGB addresses (A120 IGB address) and 

- Each inverter found the same number of partners in the IGB network and this number 

corresponds to the expected number in A121 for every inverter and 

- All inverters in the IGB network are synchronized and are receiving valid data. 

- No inverter has reported a double error (event 52, causes 9 and 10). 

In this state, the addition of further inverters has no effect on the existing IGB-Motionbus. 

4: Motionbus error; The state A155 = 3:IGB-Motionbus was already reached once and exited 

because of an error. Either an IGB cable was disconnected so that not all SDS 5000s in the IGB 

network were still connected or there was a massive EMC disturbance or the synchronicity of 

the inverters among each other was violated. 


A156 

Global 

read (3) 

IGB Number Bootups: The parameter indicates the following information for each device: how 

often the device detected a bootup of the IGB since the last time its power was switched on or it 

triggered one itself. 


209Ch 

0h 

A157.0 

Global 

read (0) 

Active IP address X3A: The parameter indicates the current IP address which is used for X3 

A. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication with POSITool via the interface is not 

possible. 

The active IP address is determined from the settings in A166.0 and is indicated in A157.0. 

209Dh 

Array 

0h 

Information 

Discuss this parameter with your network administrator so that an optimum connection is achieved. 

See also the chapter system administration in the Operating Manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). 


A157.1 

Global 

read (0) 

Active IP address X3B: The parameter indicates the current IP address which is used for X3 

B. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication with POSITool via the interface is not 

possible. 

The active IP address is determined from the settings in A166.1 and is indicated in A157.1. 

209Dh 

Array 

1h 

Information 




A158.0 

Global 

read (0) 

Active Subnetmask X3A: The parameter indicates the current subnetwork mask which is used 

for X3 A. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication via X3 A is not possible. 

Information 



209Eh 

Array 

0h 


ID 441727.02 90



04 


A.. Inverter 


A158.1 Active Subnetmask X3B: The parameter indicates the current subnetwork mask which is used 209Eh 1h 

Global 

for X3 B. 0.0.0.0 is an invalid value. In this case, communication via X3 B is not possible. 

read (0) 

Information 




Array 

A160 

Global 

read (0) 

Active DNS server address: The parameter indicates the IP address of the DNS server that is 

used by the inverter. The server is used to break down Internet addresses into IP addresses. The 

source for the DNS server shown here can be: 

- Parameter A179 (manual setting of the IP address of the DNS server) 

- The applicable DHCP server in the network 

20A0h 

0h 


A161 

Global 

read (0) 

Active Gateway: The parameter indicates the IP address of the standard gateway used by the 

inverter. The standard gateway is needed for the Internet connection via X3. 

The source of the IP address of the standard gateway shown here can be: 

- Parameter A175 (manual setting of the IP address) 

- The applicable DHCP server in the network 

20A1h 

0h 


A162.0 

Global 

read (3) 

IGB Lost Frames.0: The parameter serves as a lost frames counter for the IGB-Motionbus. It 

indicates a value for the current lost frames of expected but not correctly received data during the 

millisecond cycle. When the IGB-Motionbus is running, each SDS sends its data to all other 

inverters once every millisecond. When at least one inverter fails to send its data cyclically, this is 

detected and registered in element 0 of the parameter. This counter is incremented by the value of 

the expected but not received data. When all data of all inverters connected to the IGB have been 

correctly received, the lost frame counter is decremented by 1. 

This parameter thus provides information on the quality of the IGB network. When this value 

increases rapidly, a connection cable of the IGB has probably become disconnected or an inverter 

has been switched off. 

20A2h 

Array 

0h 


A162.1 

Global 

read (3) 

IGB Lost Frames.1: Indicates the sum of all registered errors of the IGB-Motionbus since the 

inverter was switched on. When the IGB-Motionbus is in operation, each SDS sends its data to all 

other inverters once every millisecond. This value is incremented for data which were expected and 

correctly received but not within the millisecond cycle. 

If you are using the IGB-Motionbus, the value is cleared the first time the state A155 = 3IGB- 

Motionbus is reached so that the not yet perfect synchronization while the IGB was booting will not 

be counted as an error. 

After this, the value of the parameter can only be cleared by turning off the inverter. 

This parameter thus provides information on the quality of the IGB network. When this value 

increases rapidly, a connection cable of the IGB has probably become disconnected or an inverter 

has been switched off. When this value increases irregularly, the cabling and the environment 

should be checked for EMC-suitable wiring. 

20A2h 

Array 

1h 


ID 441727.02 91



04 


A.. Inverter 


A163.0 IGB Systembits: The parameter is used for the internal activation of IGB functions. 

Global 

Bit 0: Activate remote service 

Bit 1&2: Progress of the remote service connection 

read (3) 

0 0: Blue LED is off - no remote service requested. 

0 1: Blue LED lights up like a bolt of lightning - connection to the Teleserver is being 

established. 

1 0: Blue LED flashes at regular intervals - device is waiting for connection of 

POSITool to the Teleserver. 

1 1: Blue LED on continuously - connection is completely established and remote service 

can begin. 

20A3h 

Array 

0h 

Bit 3: Remote service response message 

Bit 4: This device is the active gateway at the moment. 

Bit 5: Reset inverter. 

Bit 6: The PLL of the device has been snapped onto the IGB. 

Bit 7: Remote service requires a valid session ID. 


A163.1 

Global 

read (3) 

IGB Systembits: The parameter is used for the internal activation of IGB functions. 

Bit 0: Host controller is dead (is not living) 

Bit 1: Lost-frame series (double error) 

0: All stations sent Motionbus data on time. 

1: At least twice in succession at least one station did not send the data on time. 

Bit 2 - 7: Reserved 

20A3h 

Array 

1h 


A164.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Manual IP address for X3A: The IP address for X3 A is entered in this parameter when an IP 

address must be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. 

If you connect X3 A to a PC or the Ethernet network, make sure that X3 A and X3 B are assigned 

manual IP addresses from different subnetworks. Do not connect X3 A and X3 B at the same time 

with the same LAN and obtain their IP address from the DHCP server. 

20A4h 

Array 

0h 

Information 



Information 

Remember that a parameter change does not take effect until: 

- the value is saved with action A00.0 and 

- the inverter has been turned off and on again. 

Value range: 0 ... 192.168.3.2 ... 4294967295 


A164.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Manual IP address for X3B: The IP address for X3 B is entered in this parameter when an IP 

address must be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server exists. 

If you connect X3 A to a PC or the Ethernet network, make sure that X3 A and X3 B are assigned 

manual IP addresses from different subnetworks. Do not connect X3 A and X3 B at the same time 

with the same LAN and obtain their IP address from the DHCP server. 

20A4h 

Array 

1h 

Information 



ID 441727.02 92



04 


A.. Inverter 


Information 



- the inverter has been turned off and on again. 

A165.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Value range: 0 ... 192.168.4.2 ... 4294967295 


Manual IP subnetmask for X3A: The subnet mask for X3 A is entered in this parameter when 

an IP address has to be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server 

exists. The subnet mask is needed in addition to the IP address before you can communicate via 

TCP/IP. 

Information 



20A5h 

Array 

0h 

Information 



- the inverter has been turned off and on again 

Value range: 0 ... 255.255.255.0 ... 4294967295 


A165.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Manual IP subnetmask for X3B: The subnet mask for X3 B is entered in this parameter when 

an IP address has to be assigned manually. This is the case when, for example, no DHCP server 

exists. The subnet mask is needed in addition to the IP address before you can communicate via 

TCP/IP. 

20A5h 

Array 

1h 

Information 



Information 




Value range: 0 ... 255.255.255.0 ... 4294967295 


A166.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IP-Address-Delivery: This parameter specifies how the IP address and subnet mask of X3 A 

are obtained. 

Information 



20A6h 

Array 

0h 

Information 




0: Only manual setting. The device only uses the information in the parameters: 

- A164.0 Manual IP address 

- A165.0 Manual IP subnet mask 

ID 441727.02 93



04 


A.. Inverter 


These values are indicated in the parameters: 

- A157.0 Active IP address 

- A158.0 Active subnet mask 

1: Standard. After being connected to the local network, the device registers like the other 

components automatically with the DHCP server to obtain its IP address and subnet mask. 

Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, an attempt is made to obtain the IP 

address of the standard gateway and the DNS server from the DHCP server. If the device 

receives the information from the DHCP server within three minutes, this is entered in 

parameters A157 and A158. Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, the just 

obtained IP address of the standard gateway and the DNS server are also indicated in 

parameters A161 and A160. When the device fails to receive any information from the DHCP 

server during this time, the manual values in A164.0 and A165.0 as well as A160 and A161 are 

used instead. 

2: Only DHCP. After its connection to the local network, the device registers automatically with the 

DHCP server to obtain its information. 

When the device receives the information from the DHCP server, this is entered in parameters 

A157 and A158. Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, the just obtained IP 

address of the standard gateway and the DNS server are also indicated in parameters A161 and 

A160. 


A166.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

IP-Address-Delivery: This parameter specifies how the IP address and subnet mask of X3 B 

are obtained. 

Information 




20A6h 

Array 

1h 

Information 


0: Only manual setting. The device only uses the information in the parameters: 

- A164.0 Manual IP address 

- A165.0 Manual IP subnet mask 

These values are indicated in the parameters: 

- A157.0 Active IP address 

- A158.0 Active subnet mask 

1: Standard. After being connected to the local network, the device registers like the other 

components automatically with the DHCP server to obtain its IP address and subnet mask. 

Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, an attempt is made to obtain the IP 

address of the standard gateway and the DNS server from the DHCP server. If the device 

receives the information from the DHCP server within three minutes, this is entered in 

parameters A157 and A158. Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, the just 

obtained IP address of the standard gateway and the DNS server are also indicated in 

parameters A161 and A160. When the device fails to receive any information from the DHCP 

server during this time, the manual values in A164.1 and A165.1 as well as A160 and A161 are 

used instead. 

2: Only DHCP. After its connection to the local network, the device registers automatically with the 

DHCP server to obtain its information. 

When the device receives the information from the DHCP server, this is entered in parameters 

A157 and A158. Depending on the settings in parameters A175 and A179, the just obtained IP 

address of the standard gateway and the DNS server are also indicated in parameters A161 and 

A160. 


ID 441727.02 94



04 


A.. Inverter 


A167 

Global 

Remote Service Start: This parameter is used to set the source of the signal which you will 

use to start remote service. 

20A7h 0h 

r=3, w=3 

Information 

Read chapter integrated Bus of the Operating manual SDS 5000 before you start remote service! 

Remote service is started by a positive edge change (change from low to high) of the signal which 

you set in this parameter. The signal must then remain high. 

Remote service is finished as soon as the high level can no longer be detected on the source. 

Proceed as follows to control remote service via fieldbus: 

1. Set A167 = 2:A181 Bit 0. In this case, parameter A181 Bit 0 is the signal source. 

2. Now describe this source via fieldbus. 

Remember that you cannot start remote service while a direct connection from PC to inverter 

exists! 

Information 

This parameter determines the behavior of the inverter during remote service. It can be accidentally 

overwritten by a remote service procedure which may change the parameter to its disadvantage 

(termination of the connection, loss of data). There are two ways to prevent accidental changes: 

- While the connection is being established, read the data from the inverter. 

- Use a project file related to the inverter in which this parameter is correctly set. 

0: inactive; No remote service wanted. 

1: A800; Remote service is started by the parameter A800. 

2: A181-Bit 0; Remote service is started by bit 0 in parameter A181 Device Control Byte 2. 

3: BE1; Remote service is started by the signal on binary input 1. 

4: BE1-inverted; Remote service is started by the inverted signal on binary input 1. 









13: BE6; Die Fernwartung wird durch das Signal an Binäreingang 6 gestartet. 



16: BE7-inverted; Die Fernwartung wird durch das invertierte Signal an Binäreingang 7 gestartet. 














ID 441727.02 95



04 


A.. Inverter 


A168 Remote service with session-ID option: This parameter is used to set whether remote 20A8h 0h 

Global 

service is to be performed with a session ID. The session ID makes remote service more secure. 

When the value 1 is entered in this parameter for the inverter to which the link to the Internet is 

r=3, w=3 connected, the POSITool user must also enter the session ID before starting remote service. 

CAUTION 

This parameter is only evaluated for the inverter which is the active gateway. The setting of this 

parameter is ignored for all other inverters. This means that the parameter must always be set for 

the inverter which is the active gateway when remote service with session ID is used. 

Information 






0: inactive; The service technician does not need a session ID to establish a remote service 

connection. 

1: active; The service technician needs a session ID to establish a remote service connection. 


A169 

Global 

read (3) 

Remote service advance: The parameter indicates the progress of the establishment of the 

connection is. The parameter supplies the same information as the blue LED on the front of the 

device. 

0: noRemoteService. Remote service is not desired. 

1: connectToTeleser. The connection to the Teleserver is being established. 

2: waitToPOSITool. The device is waiting for the connection to POSITool. 

3: POSIToolOnline. The connection is established and remote service can begin. 

20A9h 

0h 


A170 

Global 

read (3) 

Remote Service Acknowledge: The parameter changes bit 0 at the same frequency as the 

blue LED on the front with the following meaning: 

- Bit 0 = 1:LED on 

- Bit 0 = 0:LED off 

You can output this parameter to a binary output and then evaluate the signal of the blue LED. 

20AAh 

0h 

Information 

This parameter can be used to represent the status of the blue LED on an external signal lamp. 


A175 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Default gateway: This parameter is used to specify the IP address of the gateway for X3 A 

when this value cannot be obtained from a DHCP server. 

There are two ways to do this: 

• When you enter an IP address in this parameter other than "0.0.0.0," this IP address is used by 

the inverter without any further checks. 

• When you enter the value "0.0.0.0" in this parameter, there are two possibilities: 

- If the value "1" or "2" is entered in parameter A166, the inverter automatically tries to obtain the 

IP address of the standard gateway from the responsible DHCP server. 

- If the value "0" is entered in parameter A166, no standard gateway is available on the inverter! 

20AFh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 96



04 


A.. Inverter 


Please remember that the DHCP server usually also supplies the IP address of the standard 

gateway. If you want the IP address of the standard gateway to be automatically set by the DHCP 

server, please be sure to enter the value "0.0.0.0" here. Otherwise the IP address of the standard 

gateway which is supplied by the DHCP server will be ignored. 

Information 

Remember that a change in the parameter does not take effect until you: 

- save the value with the action A00.0 and 

- turn the inverter off and on again. 

Information 


Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2B C0 00 hex 

A176 

Global 

Teleserver Option: This parameter is used to set whether you want a remote service 

connection via Internet or a local network (LAN). 

20B0h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

Information 






0: Internet. A remote service connection is established via the Internet. 

1: LAN. A remote service connection is established via the local network. In this case, be sure to 

consider parameter A177. 


A177 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Name LAN teleserver: If you want to establish a remote service connection via the local 

network, enter the address of the computer here on which the LAN Teleserver will be running. 

The address can be entered in two formats: 

• When the IP address is known, it can be entered directly (e.g., "192.168.3.2"). 

• When the name of the LAN Teleserver is known and the inverter has an IP address via a valid 

DNS server, the name of the LAN Teleserver can also be entered. The inverter then determines 

the IP address automatically. 

20B1h 

0h 

CAUTION 

When the name of the LAN Teleserver is entered, this must be entered with the fully qualified 

domain name. 

Example: 

• The PC on which the LAN Teleserver is running has the name "PcLanTeleserver." 

• The PC is assigned to the domain with the domain address "MuellerGmbh.de." 

The following fully qualified domain name must then be entered in the parameter: 

"PcLanTeleserver.MuellerGmbh.de" 

Please also contact your network administrator in this matter. 

Information 






Fieldbus: Type: Str80; USS-Adr: 01 2C 40 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 97



04 


A.. Inverter 


A178 Error remote service: The parameter indicates the status of remote service with a hexadecimal 20B2h 0h 

Global 

number (length: 32 bits). One diagnostic value is coded in each of the four bytes. For the meaning 

of the diagnostic values, see the operating manual SDS 5000 (ID 442289). 

read (3) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2C 80 00 hex 

A179 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Manual DNS server IP address: This parameter is used to configure the setting of the DNS 

server IP address on the inverter. 

There are two ways to do this: 

• When you enter an IP address in this parameter other than "0.0.0.0," this IP address is used by 

the inverter without any further checks. 

• When you enter the value "0.0.0.0" in this parameter, there are two possibilities: 

- If the value "1" or "2" is entered in parameter A166, the inverter automatically tries to obtain the 

IP address of the DNS server from the responsible DHCP server. 

- If the value "0" is entered in parameter A166, no DNS server is available on the inverter! 

20B3h 

0h 

Please remember that the DHCP server usually also supplies the IP address of the DNS server. If 

you want the IP address of the DNS server to be automatically set by the DHCP server, please be 

sure to enter the value "0.0.0.0" here. Otherwise the IP address of the DNS server which is 

supplied by the DHCP server will be ignored. If you have questions concerning your DHCP or DNS 

server, please contact your network administrator. 

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 2C C0 00 hex 

A180 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Device control byte: This byte contains control signals for device control. It is designed for 

fieldbus communication. The particular bit is only active when 2:Parameter is set in the related 

source selector (A60 ... A65). The signals can be monitored directly via the parameters A300 ... 

A305 on the device controller. 

Bit 0: Additional enable (A300): Takes effect in addition to terminal enable. Must be HIGH. 

Removal of the enable can also trigger a quick stop (set enable quick stop A44 =1:active). 

The brakes are applied and the end stage switches off. 

Bit 1: Fault reset (A301): Reset faults 

Bit 2: Quick stop (A302): The active ramp is I17 (for positioning control) or D81 (speed control). 

Bit 3,4: Axis selector 0 (A303), axis selector 1 (A304): With multiple-axis operation, the axis to be 

activated is selected here. 

Bit4 Bit3 Axis 

0 0 Axis 1 

0 1 Axis 2 

1 0 Axis 3 

1 1 Axis 4 

Bit 5: Axis disable (A305): Deactivate all axes. No motor on. 

Bit 6: Release brake unconditionally for MDS 5000 and FDS 5000. With SDS 5000, the brake can 

only be released if the power unit is on. 

Bit 7: Bit 7 in A180 (device control byte) is copied to bit 7 in E200 (device status byte) during each 

cycle of the device controller. When bit 7 is toggled in A180, the host PLC is informed of a 

concluded communication cycle (send, evaluate and return data). This makes cycle timeoptimized 

communication (e.g., with PROFIBUS) possible. The handshake bit 7 in A180 / 

E200 supplies no information on whether the application reacted to the process data. 

Depending on the application, other routines are provided (e.g., motion ID for command 

positioning). 

Value range: 0 ... 00000001bin ... 255 (Representation binary) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 2D 00 00 hex 

20B4h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 98



04 


A.. Inverter 


A181 Device Control Byte 2: This parameter is used to control remote service via fieldbus. Proceed 20B5h 0h 

Global 

as follows: 

1. Set A167 = 2:Parameter. In this case, parameter A181, bit 0 is the signal source. 

r=3, w=3 2. Describe this source via fieldbus. 

A182 

Global 

read (3) 

A200 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A201 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Remember that since bits 1 to 7 of this parameter are reserved, they may not be write-accessed. 

Information 








IGB Motionbus conditions: This parameter indicates which of the conditions which are 

necessary for correct operation of the IGB Motionbus have been fulfilled. 

Bit 0: Indicates that the inverter processor is working correctly for other IGB subscribers. 

Bit 1: Indicates that the inverter processor is working correctly. 

Bit 2: Indicates that the other inverters have been correctly synchronized in IGB and that their 

PLLs are engaged. 

Bit 3: Indicates that the inverter has been correctly synchronized and that its PLL is engaged. 

Bit 4: Indicates that the cyclical data has been correctly processed by the other IGB subscribers. 

Bit 5: Indicates, that the cyclical data has been correctly processed. 

Bit 6: Indicates whether the number of devices detected corresponds to the parameterized 

number 

Bit 7: Indicates whether the parameter A120 IGB Address has been correctly set. 

The address must have a valid value and be unique in all inverters. 

Bit 8: Indicates whether the parameter A121 (nominal number) has been correctly set. 

The nominal number must have a valid value and be identical in all inverters. 


COB-ID SYNC Message: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the receipt of the 

SYNC telegrams from CAN-Bus. For most applications the default value should not be changed. 

Value range: 1 ... 128 ... 2047 




Communication Cycle Period: When SYNCs are specified in a fixed time frame for 

transmission of the PDO telegrams, A201 can be used for monitoring. The entry of 0 μsec means 

the parameter is deactivated. When activated the cycle time of the SYNC telegrams is entered in 

μsec. The threshold value for triggering a timeout is 150 % of this value. Monitoring takes place 

when the NMT status is Operational and at least one SYNC telegram was received. When the 

threshold value is exceeded, fault 52:Communication with cause 2:CAN SYNC Error is triggered. 

The red LED of the CAN 5000 option board flashes three times briefly and then goes off for 1 

second. Monitoring is deactivated when the NMT status Operational is exited and the entered value 

is set to 0 μsec. 

Value range in us: 0 ... 0 ... 32000000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1us; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 32 40 00 hex 



20B6h 

20C8h 

20C9h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 99



04 


A.. Inverter 


A203 Guard Time: The master monitors the slaves with the node-guarding routine. The master polls 20CBh 0h 

Global 

node-guarding telegrams cyclically. Parameter A203 specifies the cycle time in msec. The routine is 

inactive when a cycle time of 0 msec is set. 

r=1, w=1 


A204 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A207 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A208 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A210 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A211 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 32 C0 00 hex 



Life Time Factor: The parameter A204 is used during the node guard routine to monitor the 

master. When the queries of the master do not arrive at the slave within a certain amount of time, 

the inverter triggers the life guard event (i.e., fault 52:communication). The time is calculated by 

multiplying the parameters A204 and A203. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255 




COB-ID Emergency Object: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the emergency 

telegrams to the CAN-Bus. Usually the default value should not be changed since this also 

deactivates the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set. 

Value range: 0 ... 128 ... 4294967295 




Inhibit Time Emergency: Specifies the time in multiples of 100 µsec which the inverter must at 

least wait between the sending of emergency telegrams. 

Value range in 100 us: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·100 us; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 34 00 00 hex 



Producer Heartbeat Time: In case the heartbeat protocol is to be used by the master for 

station monitoring on the CAN-Bus, this time specifies in msec how frequently the inverter will send 

heartbeat messages. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 34 80 00 hex 



Verify Config. Configuration date: The date on which the configuration and parameterization 

were finished can be stored here as the number of days since 01.01.1984. 

Value range in days since 01.01.1984: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1days since 01.01.1984; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 34 C0 00 hex 



20CCh 

20CFh 

20D0h 

20D2h 

20D3h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 100



04 


A.. Inverter 


A212 

Global 

Verify Config. Configuration time: The time at which the configuration and parameterization 

were finished can be stored here as the number of msec since 0:00 hours. 

20D4h 0h 


r=3, w=3 Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 35 00 00 hex 



A213 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A214 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A218.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A218.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Fieldbusscaling: The selection is made here between internal raw values and whole numbers 

for the representation/scaling of process data values during transmission via the four PDO 

channels. Regardless of this setting, the representation via SDO is always the whole number. 

CAUTION 

When "0:integer" is parameterized (scaled values), the runtime load increases significantly and it 

may become necessary to increase A150 cycle time to avoid the fault "57:runtime usage" or 

"35:Watchdog." 

0: integer without point; Values are transmitted as whole numbers in user units * the number of 

positions after the decimal place to the power of 10. 

1: native; Values are transferred at optimized speed in internal inverter raw format (e.g., 

increments). 


Only visible when option module CAN 5000 or ECS 5000 was recognized. 

CAN Bit Sample-Access-Point: Specifies the position at which the bits received by CAN-Bus 

are scanned. Arbitrary changes of the default value may cause transmission problems. 

-1: CIA; 

0: SAP-1; 

1: SAP-2; 

2: SAP-3; 




2. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Client -> Server: Specifies the identifier for which the 

inverter expects the telegrams for the 2nd SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon 

as a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the 

automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 

0 or if bit 31 is 1, this SDO channel is turned off. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




2. Server SDO Parameter . COB-Id Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the 

inverter sends the telegrams for the 2nd SDO channel with the responses from the client. As soon 




Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




20D5h 

20D6h 

20DAh 

20DAh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

1h 

ID 441727.02 101



04 


A.. Inverter 


A218.2 2. Server SDO Parameter . Node-ID of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO 20DAh 2h 

Global 

channel can enter its own node ID here for information purposes. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127 

r=2, w=2 

A219.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A219.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A219.2 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A220.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 





inverter sends the telegrams for the 3rd SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon as 

a station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




3. Server SDO Parameter . COB-Id Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the 

inverter sends the telegrams for the 3rd SDO channel with the responses to the client. As soon as a 

station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




3. Server SDO Parameter . Node-ID of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO 


Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127 





inverter expects the telegrams for the 4th SDO channel with the requests from the client. As soon 




NOTE 

The parameter is only visible when a CAN device controller is selected in the device configuration 


Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




20DBh 

20DBh 

20DBh 

20DCh 

0h 

1h 

2h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 102



04 


A.. Inverter 


A220.1 4. Server SDO Parameter . COB-ID Server -> Client: Specifies the identifier for which the 

Global 

inverter sends the telegrams for the 4th SDO channel with the responses to the client. As soon as a 

station with a node-ID > 31 is active on the CAN-Bus, this parameter must be changed and the 

r=2, w=2 automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If the value is 


20DCh 1h 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 4294967295 




A220.2 

Global 

4. Server SDO Parameter . Node-Id of SDO's Client: The client which uses this SDO 


20DCh 

2h 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 127 




A221.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

1. rec. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter expects the 

telegrams for the 1st PDO channel from the master. Usually the default value should not be 

changed since this also disables the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined 

Connection Set. If the value is 0 or bit 31 is 1, this service is off. 

20DDh 

0h 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 512 ... 4294967295 




A221.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

1. rec. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Specifies the type of transmission (with or 

without SYNC, etc.) when received process data from this 1st PDO channel are accepted by the 

inverter. See operating manual CAN, ID 441686. 

NOTE 



20DDh 

1h 

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255 




ID 441727.02 103



04 


A.. Inverter 


A222.0 2. rec. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Identifier for the receiving direction of the 2nd PDO 

20DEh 0h 

Global 

channel. See A221.0 

r=2, w=2 

A222.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A225.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A225.1 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 768 ... 4294967295 




2. rec. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Transmission type for 2nd PDO channel. 

See A221.1. 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255 




1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 

imaged first from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction as seen by the inverter). 

NOTE 








imaged second from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). 

NOTE 







20DEh 

20E1h 

20E1h 

1h 

0h 

1h 

ID 441727.02 104



04 


A.. Inverter 


A225.2 1. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 3. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 

20E1h 2h 

Global 

imaged third from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). 

r=1, w=1 

A225.3 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A225.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A225.5 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 








imaged fourth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). 

NOTE 







imaged fifth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). 

NOTE 







imaged sixth from the contents of the 1st PDO channel (receiving direction). 

NOTE 






20E1h 

20E1h 

20E1h 

3h 

4h 

5h 

A226.0 

2. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 1. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel, see A225.0. 

20E2h 

0h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






ID 441727.02 105



04 


A.. Inverter 


2. rec. PDO Mapping Rx. 2. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel, see A225.1. 20E2h 1h 

A226.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A226.2 


20E2h 

2h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A226.3 


20E2h 

3h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A226.4 


20E2h 

4h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A226.5 


20E2h 

5h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






ID 441727.02 106



04 


A.. Inverter 


A229.0 1. trans. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Specifies the identifier for which the inverter sends the 

Global 

telegrams for the 1st PDO channel to the master. Usually the default value should not be changed 

since the automatic identifier assignment after the Pre-Defined Connection Set is also disabled. If 

r=2, w=2 the value is 0 or bit 31 is 1, this service is off. 

20E5h 0h 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 384 ... 4294967295 




A229.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Specifies the transmission type (with or 

without SYNC, etc.) when process data are sent via this 1st PDO channel. See operating manual 

CAN, ID 441686. 

NOTE 



20E5h 

1h 

Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255 




A229.2 

Global 

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Inhibit Time: Specifies the time in multiples of 100 µsec which 

the inverter must adhere to between sending PDO telegrams on channel 1. 

20E5h 

2h 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 







A229.3 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

1. trans. PDO Parameter . Event Timer: When transmission type "254: Event-Triggerd" is 

set, the telegram is sent either after an internal event or after the time set here in msec. See 

A229.1. 

NOTE 



20E5h 

3h 





ID 441727.02 107



04 


A.. Inverter 


A230.0 2. trans. PDO Parameter . COB-ID: Identifier for sending direction of the 2nd PDO channel. 20E6h 0h 

Global 

See A230.1. 

NOTE 

r=2, w=2 



A230.1 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A230.2 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A230.3 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

A233.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

Value range: 0 ... 640 ... 4294967295 




2. trans. PDO Parameter . Transmission Type: Transmission type for 2nd PDO channel. 

See A229.1. 

NOTE 



Value range: 0 ... 254 ... 255 




2. trans. PDO Parameter . Inhibit Time: Pause time for PDO channel 2. See A229.2. 

NOTE 







2. trans. PDO Parameter . Event Timer: For PDO channel 2. See A229.3. 

NOTE 







1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 1. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 

imaged first on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 3A 40 00 hex 



20E6h 

20E6h 

20E6h 

20E9h 

1h 

2h 

3h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 108



04 


A.. Inverter 


A233.1 1. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 2. mapped Parameter: Address of the parameter which is 20E9h 1h 

Global 

imaged second on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 

r=1, w=1 



A233.2 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A233.3 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A233.4 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

A233.5 

Global 

r=1, w=1 






imaged third on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 








imaged fourth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 








imaged fifth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 







imaged sixth on the 1st PDO channel for sending. 

NOTE 






20E9h 

20E9h 

20E9h 

20E9h 

2h 

3h 

4h 

5h 

ID 441727.02 109



04 


A.. Inverter 


2. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 1. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel. See A233.0. 20EAh 0h 

A234.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A234.1 

2. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 2. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel. See A233.1. 

20EAh 

1h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A234.2 


20EAh 

2h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A234.3 


20EAh 

3h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A234.4 


20EAh 

4h 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






ID 441727.02 110



04 


A.. Inverter 


2. trans. PDO Mapping Tx. 6. mapped Parameter: For 2nd PDO channel. See A233.5. 20EAh 5h 

A234.5 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 






A237 

Global 

1. rec. PDO-Mapped Len: Indication parameter indicating in bytes the size of the expected 

receive telegram of the 1st PDO channel for the current parameterization. 

20EDh 

0h 

read (1) 

NOTE 






A238 

2. rec. PDO-Mapped Len: For 2nd PDO channel. See A237. 

20EEh 

0h 

Global 

read (2) 

NOTE 






A241 

Global 

1. trans. PDO-Mapped Len: Indication parameter indicating in bytes the size of the expected 

send telegram of the 1st PDO channel for the current parameterization. 

20F1h 

0h 

read (1) 

NOTE 






A242 

2. trans. PDO-Mapped Len: For 2nd PDO channel. See A241. 

20F2h 

0h 

Global 

read (2) 

NOTE 






ID 441727.02 111



04 


A.. Inverter 


CAN diagnostic: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information via the CAN-Bus interface. 20F5h 0h 

A245 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Bits 0-2: NMT state, state of the CANopen ® state machine: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Reset application, 

2 = Reset communication, 3 = Bootup, 4 = Pre-operational, 5 = Stopped 6 = Operational 

Bit 3: CAN controller indicates warning level. 

Bit 4: CAN controller indicates bus off. 

Bit 5: Toggle bit: Telegrams are being received on SDO channel 1. 

Bit 6: Memory bit: Receiving FIFO of SDO channel 1 has exceeded the half-full filling level. 

(Client is sending telegrams faster than they can be processed by the inverter.) 

Bit 7: Toggle bit: Telegrams are being received on PDO channel 1 (only for Operational). 

Bit 8: Memory bit: Receiving FIFO of PDO channel 1 has exceeded the half-full filling level (only 

for Operational). 

(Client is sending telegrams faster than they can be processed by the inverter.) 

Bit 9: Current state of the red LED on CAN 5000, is 1 when LED is on. 

Bit 10: Current state of the green LED on CAN 5000, is 1 when LED is on. 

Bit 11: PDO sync relationship error: PDO1 is using sync. 

All bits can be briefly deleted by sending NMT command Reset Node. 




A252.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size 

and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT ® Slave 

Controller (ESC) in which the process output data with reference values are sent by the EtherCAT ® 

master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this 

Sync-Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering 

the CANopen ® index of parameter A225 (1600 hex) in element 0 of this parameter. The indices of 

the parameters A226 (1601 hex), A227 (1602 hex) or A228 (1603 hex) can then be entered as 

necessary in the other elements. The value 0 indicates a blank entry. 

20FCh 

Array 

0h 

Value range: 0 ... 1600hex ... 65535 

(Representation hexadecimal) 



A252.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 




master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this 


the CANopen ® index of parameter A226 (1601 hex) in element 1 of this parameter. The indices of 

the parameters A225 (1600 hex), A227 (1602 hex) or A228 (1603 hex) can then be entered as 


20FCh 

Array 

1h 





ID 441727.02 112



04 


A.. Inverter 


A252.2 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size 20FCh 2h 

Global and the access of the inverter processor to the portion of memory in the EtherCAT ® Slave 


r=3, w=3 master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this 


the value 0 (for unused) in element 2 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A225 

(1600 hex) and A226 (1601 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1. 

Up to 12 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the 

CANopen ® index of parameter A227 (1602 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that 

the corresponding block 100921 ECS PDO3-rx Map must also be instanced here. 

Array 

Value range: 0 ... 0000hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal) 



A252.3 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 2 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 2 controls the memory size 



r=3, w=3 master to the inverter. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this 


the value 0 (for unused) in element 3 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A225 

(1600 hex) and A226 (1601 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1 

and sometimes the index of A227 (1603 hex) in element 2. Up to 18 parameters can already be 

transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen ® index of parameter A228 

(1603 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100923 ECS 

PDO4-rx Map must also be instanced here. 

20FCh 

Array 

3h 

A253.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A253.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 






Controller (ESC) in which the process input data with actual values are sent by the inverter to the 

EtherCAT ® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync- 

Manager. This array contains four elements of the data type U16. We recommend entering the 

CANopen ® index of parameter A233 (1A00 hex) in element 0 of this parameter. The indices of the 

parameters A234 (1A01 hex), A235 (1A02 hex) or A236 (1A03 hex) can then be entered as 


Value range: 0 ... 1A00hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal) 








CANopen ® index of parameter A234 (1A01 hex) in element 1 of this parameter. The indices of the 

parameters A233 (1A00 hex), A235 (1A02 hex) or A236 (1604 hex) can then be entered as 


Value range: 0 ... 1A01hex ... 65535 (Representation hexadecimal) 



20FDh 

Array 

20FDh 

Array 

0h 

1h 

ID 441727.02 113



04 


A.. Inverter 


A253.2 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 3 PDO Assign: The Sync-Manager 3 controls the memory size 



r=3, w=3 EtherCAT ® master. These data specify which PDO mapping parameters are assigned to this Sync- 


value 0 (for unused) in element 2 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A233 (1A00 

hex) and A234 (1A01 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1. Up to 

12 parameters can already be transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the 

CANopen ® index of parameter A235 (1A02 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that 

the corresponding block 100922 ECS PDO3-rx Map must also be instanced here. 

20FDh 

Array 

2h 




A253.3 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A256 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A257.0 

Global 

read (3) 






value 0 (for unused) in element 3 of this parameter because the indices of parameters A233 (1A00 

hex) and A234 (1A01 hex) have already been entered as default values in elements 0 and 1 and 

sometimes the index of A235 (1A03 hex) in element 2. Up to 18 parameters can already be 

transferred in this way. If more process data are required, the CANopen ® index of parameter A236 

(1A03 hex) can be specified here. However, remember that the corresponding block 100924 ECS 

PDO4-tx Map must also be instanced here. 





EtherCAT ® Address: Shows the address of the inverter within the EtherCAT ® network. The 

value is usually specified by the EtherCAT ® master. It is either derived from position of the station 

within the EtherCAT ® ring or is purposely selected by the user. Values usually start at 1001 

hexadecimal (1001h is the first device after the EtherCAT ® master, 1002h is the second, and so 

on). 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 65535 



EtherCAT ® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT 

interface ECS 5000 and the connection to the EtherCAT ® . 

A text with the following format is indicated in element 0: "StX ErX L0X L1X" 

Part 1 of the text means: 

St Abbreviation of EtherCAT ® Device State (State of the EtherCAT ® State Machine) 

X Digit for state: 1 Init State 

2 Pre-operational state 

(3 Requested Bootstrap State is not supported.) 

4 Safe-operational state 

8 Operational state 

20FDh 

Array 

2100h 

2101h 

Array 

3h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 114



04 


A.. Inverter 


0x11 Error during INIT State 

0x12 Error during PREOP State 

(0x13 Error during BOOTSTRAP) State 

0x14 Error during Safe-Operational State 

0x18 Error during Operational State 


Er Abbreviation of EtherCAT ® Device Error 

X Digit for state: 0 No error 

1 Booting error, ECS 5000 error 

2 Invalid configuration, select configuration with EtherCAT ® in 

POSI Tool. 

3 Unsolicited state change, inverter has changed state by itself. 

4 Watchdog, no more data from EtherCAT ® even though timeout 

time expired. 

5 PDI watchdog, host processor timeout 


L0 Abbreviation for LinkOn of port 0 (the RJ45 socket labeled "IN") 

X Digit for state: 0 No link (no connection to other EtherCAT ® device) 

1 Link detected (connection to other device found) 


L1 Abbreviation for LinkOn of port 1 (the RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") 

X Digit for state: 0 No link (no connection to other EtherCAT ® device) 

1 Link detected (connection to other device found) 



A257.1 

Global 

read (3) 

EtherCAT ® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT ® 


A text with the following format is indicated in element 1: „L0 xx L1 xx" 

2101h 

Array 

1h 


L0 Abbreviation for Link Lost Counter Port 0 (RJ45 socket labeled "IN") 

xx Number of lost connections (hexadecimal) on the port 


L1 Abbreviation for Link Lost Counter Port 1 (RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") 

xx Number of lost connections (hexadecimal) on the port. 



A257.2 

Global 

read (3) 

EtherCAT ® Diagnosis: Indication of internal inverter diagnostic information on the EtherCAT ® 


A text with the following format is indicated in element 2: „R0 xxxx R1 xxxx" 

2101h 

Array 

2h 


R0 Abbreviation for Rx ErrorCounter Port 0 (RJ45 socket labeled "IN") 

xxxx ErrorCounter in hexadecimal with number of registered errors such as, for example, FCS 

checksum, … 

ID 441727.02 115



04 


A.. Inverter 



R0 Abbreviation for Rx ErrorCounter Port 1 (RJ45 socket labeled "OUT") 

xxxx ErrorCounter in hexadecimal with number of registered errors such as, for example, FCS 

checksum, … 



A258 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

EtherCAT ® PDO Timeout: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should 

be activated so that the inverter does not continue with the last received reference values after a 

failure of the EtherCAT ® network or the master. After the EtherCAT ® master has put this station 

(the inverter in this case) into the state "OPERATIONAL," it begins to send new process data 

(reference values, and so on) cyclically. When this monitor function has been activated, it is active 

in the "OPERATIONAL" state. 

When no new data are received via EtherCAT for longer than the set timeout time, the monitor 

function triggers the fault 52:communication with the cause of fault 6:EtherCAT PDO. 

If the EtherCAT ® master shuts down this station correctly (exits the "OPERATIONAL" state), the 

monitoring function is not triggered. 

2102h 

0h 

The timeout time can be set in milliseconds with this parameter. 

The following special setting values are available: 

0: Monitoring inactive 

1 to 99: Monitoring by STÖBER watchdog is active. Timeout time is always 1000 milliseconds. 

From 100: Monitoring by STÖBER watchdog is active. The numeric value is the timeout value in 

milliseconds. 

65534: Monitoring is not set by this value but by the "SM Watchdog" functionality of EtherCAT. 

For diagnosis of this externally set function, see parameter A259. 

65535: Monitoring inactive 

Information 

You will only need the STÖBER watchdog function if your controller does not have a watchdog 

function itself. If your controller does have a watchdog function, STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK 

recommends the setting A258 = 65534 (EtherCAT ® watchdog). 




A259.0 

Global 

read (3) 

EtherCAT SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should 


failure of the EtherCAT network or the master. 

If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be 

set in the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: 

2103h 

Array 

0h 

Element 0 contains the resulting watchdog time in 1 milliseconds. 



ID 441727.02 116



04 


A.. Inverter 


A259.1 EtherCAT SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should 

Global 


failure of the EtherCAT network or the master. 

read (3) If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be 

set in the EtherCAT master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: 

2103h 

Array 

1h 

Element 1 contains whether the watchdog was just triggered (1) or not (0). 

When the watchdog is triggered and the function is activated (see value 65534 in parameter A258), 

the fault 52:communication is triggered on the inverter with cause of fault 6:EtherCAT PDO. 



A259.2 

Global 

read (3) 

EtherCAT ® SM-Watchdog: This PDO monitoring function (PDO = Process Data Object) should 


failure of the EtherCAT ® network or the master. 

If the value 65534 was set in another parameter A258 EtherCAT PDO-Timeout, the timeout can be 

set in the EtherCAT ® master (TwinCAT software). The result is then indicated in this parameter: 

2103h 

Array 

2h 

Element 2 contains the number of times this watchdog has been triggered. 



A260 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

EtherCAT ® synchronization mode: This parameter activates EtherCAT ® synchronization 

monitoring mode on the inverter. The inverter offers the option of monitoring the synchronization 

between master and inverter via Distributed Clock. A check is made to determine whether the time 

difference between the arrival of the EtherCAT ® Frame at the inverter and the point in time of the 

SYNC0 signal on the inverter is within a tolerable time range. 

When monitoring is activated, Sync errors are counted with an error counter and indicated in 

parameter A261.2. 

Synchronization mode is deactivated and activated by entering the following values: 

2104h 

0h 

0:Synchronization deactivated 

1:Synchronization active 

Other values are not defined and are therefore not permitted. 

CAUTION 

When the PLC cycle time is not the SYNC0 cycle time, all synchronization errors can no longer be 

detected. 

CAUTION 

Activation of synchronization mode requires different amounts of run time depending on the cycle 

time of the PLC and the inverter. With high-performance applications are being run on the inverter, 

activation of synchronization mode may cause the error "runtime load." 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 65535 



ID 441727.02 117



04 


A.. Inverter 


A261.0 EtherCAT ® Sync-Diagnostics: This parameter can be used to diagnose errors in 

2105h 0h 

Global 

synchronization mode. 

The parameter indicates the following error codes: 

Array 

read (3) 

0: No error 

1: Sync Manager 2 and Sync Manager 3 have different cycle times. 

2: Cycle time < 1 ms: The cycle time must be ³ 1000 µs. 

3: Uneven cycle time: Cycle time must be a whole-number multiple of 1000 µs. 

4: Internal error: Internal device PLL could not be started. 

Possible cause: The project does not contain parameter G90. 

5: A required EtherCAT parameter does not exist. 

Parameters A260 and A261 must be available for EtherCAT ® with synchronization. 

6: Internal error: Inverter interrupt could not be initialized. 

Possible cause: Firmware error 

Other values: Not defined 



A261.1 

EtherCAT ® Sync-Diagnostics: This element is reserved. 

2105h 

1h 

Global 

read (3) 



Array 

A261.2 

Global 

read (3) 

EtherCAT ® Sync-Diagnostics: This parameter indicates the synchronization errors which 

have occurred up to now between master and inverter. 

Synchronization mode must be activated in parameter A260 before the counter function becomes 

active. 

When the error counter is continuously incremented, this indicates a parameterization error on the 

master or the inverter. 

Occasional incrementing of the counter (e.g., in the minutes range) indicates a jitter in the total 

EtherCAT system. 

2105h 

Array 

2h 



A262.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 0 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the 

synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller 

on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the 

parameter can only have the following values: 

2106h 

0h 

0: not synchronized 

No other values possible. 

Information 

Please note that the synchronization operating mode is set exclusively by the controller. If you 

change the parameter, your settings will have no effect. 

0: not synchronized; 

1: synchronized with AL event on this Sync Manager; 

2: synchronized with AL event Sync0; 


32: synchronized with AL event of SM0; 

ID 441727.02 118



04 


A.. Inverter 





A262.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 



EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 0 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle 

time for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync 

Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the parameter can only have the 

following values: 



2106h 

1h 

Information 

Please note that the cycle time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, 

your settings will have no effect. 











A262.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 0 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time 

for Sync Manager 0 (write mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync 



2106h 

2h 



Information 

Please note that the shift time is set exclusively by the controller. If you change the parameter, your 

settings will have no effect. 











ID 441727.02 119



04 


A.. Inverter 


A263.0 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 1 Synchronization type: The parameter indicates the 

Global 

synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller 

on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never synchronized, the 

r=3, w=3 parameter can only have the following values: 

2107h 0h 



Information 













A263.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 


time for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync 



2107h 

1h 



Information 













ID 441727.02 120



04 


A.. Inverter 


A263.2 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 1 Shift time: The parameter indicates the value of the shift time 

Global 

for Sync Manager 1 (read mailbox) which was set by the controller on the inverter. Since Sync 


r=3, w=3 following values: 

2107h 2h 



Information 













A264.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 


synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the 

controller on the inverter. Since Sync Managers for mailbox communication are never 

synchronized, the parameter can only have the following values: 

2108h 

0h 


2: Synchronized with AL Event Sync0: Synchronized operating mode (synchronous to sync 0 

signal). 


Information 













ID 441727.02 121



04 


A.. Inverter 


A264.1 EtherCAT ® Sync Manager 2 Cycle time: The parameter indicates the value of the cycle 2108h 1h 

Global 

time in ns for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. 

r=3, w=3 

A264.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A265.0 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Information 














in ns for Sync Manager 2 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. 

Information 














synchronization operating mode for Sync Manager 3 (input process data) which was set by the 

controller on the inverter. The parameter can only have the following values: 


2: Synchronized with AL Event Sync0: Synchronized operating mode (synchronous to sync 0 

signal) 


Information 








2108h 

2109h 

2h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 122



04 


A.. Inverter 





A265.1 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A265.2 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A266 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A267.0 

Global 

read (3) 




time in ns for Sync Manager 3 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. 

Information 














in ns for Sync Manager 3 (output process data) which was set by the controller on the inverter. 

Information 













ECS Tolerance barrier: This parameter is used to specify the maximum permissible number of 

ECS 5000 events. When this threshold value is exceeded, the fault 55:option board with the cause 

9:ECS5000failure is triggered. 

Never change this value without first contacting STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG. 

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 12 


ECS internal test counter: This parameter counts any ECS-5000 events which are detected 

between the control unit of the inverter and the ECS 5000. Different causes are counted separately 

in an array with 4 elements. When the counter is incremented rapidly, this may mean EMC 

interference. 


2109h 

2109h 

210Ah 

210Bh 

Array 

1h 

2h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 123



04 


A.. Inverter 


A267.1 ECS internal test counter: This parameter counts any ECS-5000 events which are detected 

Global 



read (3) interference. 

210Bh 

Array 

1h 


A267.2 

Global 

read (3) 




interference. 

210Bh 

Array 

2h 


A267.3 

Global 

read (3) 




interference. 

210Bh 

Array 

3h 


A267.4 

ECS internal test counter 

210Bh 

4h 

Global 

read (3) 


Array 

A268 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

ECS compatibility mode: Adjustment of the behavior of the EtherCAT ® firmware to ensure it 

can still be used with software in other devices which may possibly be outdated, for example in 

EtherCAT ® Master. 

0: current; This is the correct setting for the behavior for currently applicable EtherCAT ® 

specifications. If possible, do not change this setting to produce and require behavior in 

accordance with current requirements. 

1: No PDO test before OP; In this case the drive as an EtherCAT ® slave no longer checks upon 

prompt for transition to OPERATIONAL whether PDOs have previously been received (in sync 

manager 2). Use this setting only if you do not need a workaround for non-problem free behavior 

of the EtherCAT ® master! 

210Ch 

0h 


A270.0 

Global 

read (2) 

PN Port X200 state: For X200, the parameter shows whether a connection to another 

Ethernet subscriber exists and which properties it has. 

0: Error; it is not possible to read this information from the PN 5000. 

1: No connection; the port is not physically connected to another Ethernet port (e.g. a PROFINET 

device). 

2: 10 MBit/s; the port is connected to a device which does not support the necessary data rate and 

is unsuitable for PROFINET communication. 

3: 100 MBit/s; the port is connected to a device which does not support offer full duplex and is 

unsuitable for PROFINET communication. 

4: Connection OK; the port is correctly connected to other devices on the Ethernet level. Please 

note that this is a necessary criteria for correctly functioning PROFINET communication, but not 

necessarily sufficient. 

210Eh 

Array 

0h 


ID 441727.02 124



04 


A.. Inverter 


X20xstate 

210Eh 1h 

A270.1 

Global 

read (2) 

0: error; 

1: co connection; 

2: 10 MBit/s; 

3: 100 MBit/s; 

4: link OK; 


Array 

A271 

Global 

read (2) 

PN state: The parameter shows the state of the PROFINET unification between a PROFINET IO 

controller (controller) and the inverter. Evaluate these parameters if there are any problems during 

booting up the PROFINET communication. 

0:offline; error while detecting the PN 5000 in the inverter. 

1: step 1; 

2: step 2; 

3: phase 1; 

4: phase 2; 

5: cyclic data exchange; 

210Fh 

0h 


A272.0 

Global 

r=3, w=5 

PN module/submodule list: STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK offers several combinations of 

modules and submodules. One of the combinations must be selected for configuring the 

PROFINET. The selected combination is then shown in these parameters when the booting 

process is completed. Evaluate these parameters if you have noted inconsistencies in the number 

of bytes between the process data formation and the quantity of data exchanged with the controller. 

The combination is displayed as a coded decimal number and contains four pieces of partial 

information: 

2110h 

Array 

0h 

MMM-SSS-III-OOO 

MMM: Module ID 

SSS: Submodule ID 

III: Input data byte length 

OOO: Output data byte length 

Example: 

103103012012 corresponds to 

Module ID: 103 

Submodule ID: 104 

Input data length: 12 byte 

Output data length: 12 byte 


A272.1 

PN module list 

2110h 

1h 

Global 

r=3, w=5 


Array 

ID 441727.02 125



04 


A.. Inverter 


A273 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

PN device name: The device name is of central importance for addressing in PROFINET. It 

replaces the bus address known from PROFIBUS and must be entered individually for every 

inverter in this parameter. 

When deciding on the device name, please observe the existing convention as described in the 

PROFINET manual. 

The device name will only become active when you have saved the parameters in the inverter (A00 

save values) and you have switched the inverter off and on again. 

2111h 0h 

A274 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A275 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A276 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A278.0 

Global 

read (3) 

Default setting: STOEBER-Inverter 


PN IP address: Display of the last IP address which the inverter took from a PROFINET IO 

controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old address will be displayed. 

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295 


PN subnet mask: Display of the last subnet mask which the inverter took from a PROFINET 

IO controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old subnet mask will be displayed. 

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295 


PN gateway: Display of the last gateway IP address which the inverter took from a PROFINET 

IO controller. If there is no PROFINET communication, an old address will be displayed. 

Value range: 0 ... 0.0.0.0 ... 4294967295 


PN diagnosis: Parameter A278 is used for diagnosis of the PROFINET communication. Different 

values are displayed in the 9 elements of the parameter. 

Element 0 shows a text in the following form: 

CosXX StX ECntXX, this means: 

CosXX 

- Cos stands for Communication Change of State 

- XX shows the messages from the following bits as a hexadecimal number: 

Bit 0: Ready (RCX_COMM_COS_READY) The Ready flag is set as soon as the protocol stack 

is started properly. 

Bit 1 Running (RCX_COMM_COS_RUN) The Running flag is set when the protocol stack has 

been configured properly. 

Bit 2 Bus On (RCX_COMM_COS_BUS_ON) The Bus On flag is set to indicate to the host 

system whether or not the protocol stack has the permission to open network connections. 

Bit 3 Configuration Locked (RCX_COMM_COS_CONFIG_LOCKED) The Configuration Locked 

flag is set, if the communication channel firmware has locked the configuration database 

against being overwritten. 

Bit 4 Configuration New (RCX_COMM_COS_CONFIG_NEW) The Configuration New flag is set 

by the protocol stack to indicate that a new configuration became available, which has not 

been activated. 

Bit 5 Restart Required (RCX_COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED) The Restart Required flag 

is set when the channel firmware requests to be restarted 

Bit 6 Restart Required Enable (RCX_COMM_COS_RESTART_REQUIRED_ENABLE) The 

Restart Required Enable flag is used together with the Restart Required flag above 

Bit 7 currently not used 

2112h 

2113h 

2114h 

2116h 

Array 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 126



04 


A.. Inverter 


StX 

- St stands for Communication State 

- X shows the number of the state: 

0 = UNKNOWN 

1 = OFFLINE 

2 = STOP 

3 = IDLE 

4 = OPERATE 

ECntXX 

- ECnt stands for Error Count 

- XX shows the number of errors determined since the last supply on or reset 


A279.0 

Global 

read (3) 

PN error history: Array A279 shows the PROFINET communication error history in its four 

elements. Element 0 shows the last (most up-to-date) error since the last time the inverter was 

switched on. 

If this parameter value is zero, no error has occurred. 

If the value is different to 0, please refer to the PROFINET documentation. 

2117h 

Array 

0h 


A300 

Global 

read (2) 

Additional enable: Indicates the current value of the AdditEna signal (additional enable) on the 

interface to the device control (configuration, block 100107). 

The "additional enable" signal works exactly like the enable signal on terminal X1. Both signals are 

AND linked. This means that the power end stage of the inverter is only enabled when both signals 

are HIGH. 

212Ch 

0h 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4B 00 00 hex 

A301 

Global 

read (2) 

Fault reset: Indicates the current value of the FaultRes signal (fault reset) on the interface to the 

device control (configuration, block 100107). 

The Fault reset signal triggers a fault reset. When the inverter has malfunctioned, a change from 

LOW to HIGH causes this fault to be reset if the cause of the fault has been corrected. Reset is not 

possible as long as A00 Save values is active. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

212Dh 

0h 


A302 

Global 

read (2) 

Quick stop: Indicates the current value of the QuickStp signal (quick stop) on the interface to the 


The quick stop signal triggers a quick stop of the drive. During positioning mode, the acceleration 

specified in I17 determines the braking time. When the axis is in "revolutions" (speed) mode, the 

parameter D81 determines the braking time (see also A39 and A45). 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

212Eh 

0h 


ID 441727.02 127



04 


A.. Inverter 


A303 Axis selector 0: Indicates the current value of the AxSel0 signal (axis selector 0) on the 

212Fh 0h 

Global 


There are two "axis selector 0 / 1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes can be selected in 

read (2) binary code. 

NOTE 




0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4B C0 00 hex 

A304 

Global 

read (2) 

Axis selector 1: Indicates the current value of the AxSel1 signal (axis selector 1) on the 


There are two "axis selector 0 / 1" signals with which one of the max. of 4 axes can be selected in 

binary code. 

2130h 

0h 

NOTE 




0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 00 00 hex 

A305 

Global 

read (2) 

Axis disable: Indicates the current value of the AxDis signal (axis disable) on the interface to the 


The axis-disable signal deactivates all axes. 

NOTE 




2131h 

0h 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 40 00 hex 

A306 

X1.Enable: The level of the X1.Enable binary input is displayed. 

2132h 

0h 

Global 

read (2) 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 4C 80 00 hex 

A576 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

Control word: Control word with control signals for the device state machine and the drive 

function. 

Note that this parameter is not available if you use a device state machine as per DSP 401 in your 

project. Select the device state machine in the configuration assistant, step 4. Parameter E53 

displays the device controller that you have chosen. 

6040h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 128



04 


A.. Inverter 


• Bit 0: "Switch on" - is set to 1 for switchon when bit 0 in status word "Ready to Switch On" is 1. 

• Bit 1: "Enable voltage" - should always be left at 1, is active. 

• Bit 2: "Quick stop" - is set to 0 when the drive is to come to a standstill as soon as possible. 

• Bit 3: "Enable operation" - is set to 1 for enable when bit 1 in status word "Switched on" is 1. 

• Bit 4-6: "Operation mode specific" - see below. 

• Bit 7: "Fault reset" - edge 0 -> 1 to acknowledge queued fault. 

• Bit 8: "Halt" - is not supported, always leave 0 = inactive. 

• Bit 9 and 10: "Reserved" - always leave 0 = inactive. 

• Bit 11 and 12: Axis selector, bit 0 and 1. Select the axis here for multi-axis operation. 00 = axis1, 

… 

• Bit 13: Axis disable. Deactivate all axes. No motor connected. 

• Bit 14: Release brake. 

• Bit 15: "Reserved" - always leave 0 = inactive. 

On bits 4-6 "operation mode specific" - the meaning of the bits depends on the operating mode of 

the inverter. This is set in A608 (modes of operation). 

The following operating modes and related bit meanings are available at this time: 

Job mode: 

• Bit-4: Jog + 

• Bit-5: Jog - 

• Bit-6: Reserved, always 0 

Homing mode: 

• Bit-4: Homing operation start 



Interpolated position mode: 

• Bit-4: Interpolation mode active 



Comfort reference value: 

• Bit-4: HLG block, ramp generator input = 0 

• Bit-5: HLG stop, freeze ramp generator input 

• Bit-6: HLG zero, ramp generator input = 0 (same as bit 4) 

Can be accessed via CANopen ® under: 

Index 

6040 hex 

Subindex 0 



ID 441727.02 129



04 


A.. Inverter 


A577 

Global 

read (1) 

Status word: The status word indicates the current state of the device. Some bits are operation 

mode specific. 

Note that this parameter is not available if you use a device state machine as per DSP 401 in your 

project. Select the device state machine in the configuration assistant, step 4. Parameter E53 

displays the device controller that you have chosen. 

6041h 0h 

• Bit-0: "Ready to switch on" 

• Bit-1: "Switched on" 

• Bit-2: "Operation enabled" 

• Bit-3: "Fault" 

• Bit-4: "Voltage enabled" 

• Bit-5: "Quick stop" 

• Bit 6: "Switch on disabled" 

• Bit-7: "Warning" 

• Bit-8: "Message" 

• Bit-9: "Remote," corresponds to the negated output Local of block 320 Local 

• Bit-10: "Target reached," see below 

• Bit-11: "Internal limit active," 1 = limit is active 

• Bit-12 and 13: "Operation mode specific," see below 

• Bit-14 and 15: "PLL Bit0" and "PLL Bit1" with the meaning of interpolated position mode: 

00: OK 

01: Cycle time extended and still engaged 

10: Cycle time shortened and still engaged 

11: Not engaged 

Bit-10 "Target reached," bit-11 "Internal limit active" and bits 12 and 13 "Operation mode specific." 

The meaning of the bits depends on the operating mode of the inverter. This is set in the parameter 

A608 modes of operation. 

The following operating modes are currently available with their related bit meanings: 


• Bit-10: "Target reached," reference-value-reached flag, same as D183 "n-window reached" 

• Bit-11: "Internal limit active," 1 = limit is active, one of the following signals is active: D182, D185, 

D186, D308, D309, D462 

Homing mode: 

• Bit-12: Homing attained: Reference point found 

• Bit-13: Homing error: termination of referencing due to error 

Interpolated position mode: 

• Bit-12: Interpolation mode active 


Can be accessed via CANopen ® under: 

Index 

6041hex 

Subindex 0 


ID 441727.02 130



04 


A.. Inverter 


A800 

Global 

Remote service start: You can use this parameter to start remote service via the operator 

panel on the front of the inverter. The effectiveness of this parameter depends on how parameter 

A167 is set. 

r=3, w=3 

Information 

Before you start remote service, read chapter Integrated Bus of the Operating Manual SDS 5000 

and the description of parameter A167! 

0: inactive; No remote service wanted. 

1: active; Request remote service. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 C8 00 00 hex 

A890 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A891 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.0 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.1 

Global 

read (3) 

Para-Acc-Cntrl: You can activate an access logging function in this parameter. This can be 

useful in the diagnosis of parameter write modules or functions in conjunction with fieldbuses. 

This function logs the last 10 write accesses to parameters usingCANopen, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS 

and PROFINET. Even defective attempts which have been rejected by the inverter are logged here, 

in this case A894 shows an error code as a result. 

0: inactive; No parameter accesses have been logged. 

1: active; Access logging function is active. When changing from 0: inactive after 1: active the 

previously logged values are deleted. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 DE 80 00 hex 

Para-Acc-Next: If the access logging function is activated (see parameter A890 the element in 

which the next write access will be logged is displayed here. The element number applies to 

parameters 

- A892 Para-Acc-Address, 

- A893 Para-Acc-Value, 

- A894 Para-Acc-Result and 

- A895 Para-Acc-Time. 

You will find the last logged entry in the parameters one element before the number displayed here. 

Value range: 0 ... 0 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 01 DE C0 00 hex 

Para-Acc-Address: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the 

addresses of the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. 

The array parameter is designed as a ring memory. If element 9 is described, the next entry will 

take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 

Para-Acc-Next contains the oldest logged access. This element will be overwritten on the next 

write access. The newest value is contained in the element which is smaller than A891 by 1. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 01 DF 00 00 hex 








Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 131



04 


A.. Inverter 


A892.2 Para-Acc-Address: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the 

Global 



read (3) take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 

Array 




A892.3 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.4 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.5 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.6 

Global 

read (3) 

A892.7 

Global 

read (3) 




































Array 

Array 

Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 132



04 


A.. Inverter 


A892.8 Para-Acc-Address: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the 

Global 



read (3) take place in element 0. Old entries will be overwritten. The element which is displayed in A891 

Array 




A892.9 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.0 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.1 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.2 

Global 

read (3) 








Para-Acc-Value: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the values of 

the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The values are displayed as 4-byte 

numbers in hexadecimal representation. The sequence of the bytes is displayed as they were 

originally received by the fieldbus, and is different depending on the fieldbus system being used: 

- in the case of PROFIBUS and PROFINET the data bytes are arranged readably as usual 

(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 

- in the case of CANopen and EtherCAT the bytes are arranged otherwise (34120000 hex = 4660 

dez). 





Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 DF 40 00 hex 






(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 

Array 

Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 133



04 


A.. Inverter 



dez). 

A893.3 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.4 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.5 

Global 

read (3) 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 






Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 134



04 


A.. Inverter 


A893.6 Para-Acc-Value: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the values of 

Global 



read (3) originally received by the fieldbus, and is different depending on the fieldbus system being used: 

Array 


(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 






A893.7 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.8 

Global 

read (3) 

A893.9 

Global 

read (3) 






(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 











(00001234 hex = 4660 dez). 


dez). 

Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 135



04 


A.. Inverter 







A894.0 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.1 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.2 

Global 

read (3) 

Para-Acc-Result: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the results of 

the last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The following results are normally often 

displayed: 

- 00000000: The write access was successful, the parameter value has been accepted. 

- 0000004D: The parameter which was accessed does not exist. 

- 00000052: The parameter value to be transmitted is too small, it is not accepted. 

- 00000053: The parameter value to be transmitted is too large, it is not accepted. 

- other values: Please contact STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK. 








displayed: 













displayed: 











Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 136



04 


A.. Inverter 


A894.3 Para-Acc-Result: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the results of 

Global 


displayed: 

read (3) - 00000000: The write access was successful, the parameter value has been accepted. 

Array 










A894.4 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.5 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.6 

Global 

read (3) 



displayed: 













displayed: 













displayed: 






Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 137



04 


A.. Inverter 







A894.7 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.8 

Global 

read (3) 

A894.9 

Global 

read (3) 



displayed: 













displayed: 













displayed: 











Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 138



04 


A.. Inverter 


A895.0 Para-Acc-Time: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the times of the 

Global 

last 10 write accesses will be logged in the elements. The times are stated as values in 

milliseconds, the values are relative to each other and are not related to the operation duration in 

read (3) E30. 

Array 

A895.1 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.2 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.3 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.4 

Global 

read (3) 





Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 DF C0 00 hex 

Para-Acc-Time: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the times of the 



E30. 









E30. 









E30. 









E30. 






Array 

Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 139



04 


A.. Inverter 


A895.5 Para-Acc-Time: If the access locking function is activated (see parameter A890) the times of the 

Global 



read (3) E30. 

Array 

A895.6 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.7 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.8 

Global 

read (3) 

A895.9 

Global 

read (3) 









E30. 









E30. 









E30. 









E30. 






Array 

Array 

Array 

Array 

ID 441727.02 140



04 


A.. Inverter 


A900 

Global 

SysEnableOut: Enable output of the device controller to the axis(axes). Indicates that the power 

section is on and enables reference value processing. 

r=3, w=4 

A901 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A902 

Global 

read (2) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 E1 00 00 hex 

SysQuickstopOut: Quick stop output of the device controller to the axis(axes). Indicates that the 

device controller forces a quick stop which is executed by speed control. Reference value 

processing of the axis must support this with priority before axis reference value processing. 


SysStatusword: Status word of the device controller as per DSP402. 

Bit 

Bit 

0 Ready for switch-on 8 Message 

1 Switched on 9 Remote 

2 Oper. enabled 10 Reference value reached 

3 Fault 11 Limit value 

4 Voltage disabled 12...15 Reserved 

5 Quick stop 

6 Switch-on disable 

7 Warning 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 E1 80 00 hex 

A903 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A905 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A906 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A907 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

A910 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

SysOpenBrake: Command bit: Open halting brake (X2). This signal bypasses brake control and 

goes directly to plug connector X2. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 01 E1 C0 00 hex 

New PDO1 data for Tx: The parameter is set to "1" when a PDO is received. 


Time stamp PDO1: Time relationship between PDO receipt and cycle time. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 01 E2 80 00 hex 

Reference timestamp PLL: Time relationship of PLL to cycle time. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 01 E2 C0 00 hex 

SysAdditionalEnableIn: Additional enable signal of the axis to the device controller. A logical 

AND link with the enable signal (usually from binary input X1.enable) occurs on the device 

controller. 

Information 

When POSITool establishes a connection to the inverter, this parameter is always read, even when 

"write parameter" was specified in POSITool as the data communication direction. 


ID 441727.02 141



04 


A.. Inverter 


SysQuickstopIn: Quick stop request of the axis to the device controller. 

A911 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A912 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A913 

Global 

r=3, w=4 


SysFaultResetInput: Fault reset of the axis to the device controller. 


SysQuickstopEndInput: Quick stop end signal of the axis to the device controller. Indicates 

that a quick stop was concluded. With applications without braking control, this is usually the 

"standstill reached" signal. With applications with braking control, this is usually the "brake closed" 

signal. 


A914 

Global 

r=2, w=4 

SysControlWord: Control word to DSP402 device controller. 

Bit 

Bit 

1 Switch on 9...15 Reserved 

2 Disable voltage 

3 Quick stop 

4 Enable oper. 

5 Disable HLG 

6 Stop HLG 

7 HLG zero 

8 Reset fault 


A916 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A918 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A919 

Global 

r=3, w=4 

A922 

Global 

r=2, w=4 

Reference cycle-time: Cycle time of the SYNC telegram. Is created from G98. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 01 E5 00 00 hex 

SysLocal: Signal of the device controller to the axis (axes). Indicates that local operation is 

activated ("hand" key). 


SysEnableLocal: Signal of the device controller to the axis (axes). Indicates that local operation 

("hand" key) and local enable ("I/O" or "I" key) are activated. 


SysControlWordBit4: Signal of device control on the axis/axes. The function is applicationspecific. 

The parameter is only functional for the applications listed below. 

Application 

Comfort reference value 

Meaning 

Corresponds to the Stop signal 


ID 441727.02 142



04 


A.. Inverter 


A923 

Global 



r=2, w=4 

Application 



Meaning 

Halt ramp generator (with lower priority than Stop and Quick 

Stop) 

A924 

Global 

r=2, w=4 



Application 


Meaning 

Corresponds to the Stop signal 


A925 

Global 

read (2) 

SysTargetReached: Signal of the axis to the device control. The reference value was reached. 

The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed 

below. 

Application 


Meaning 

Reference-value-reached flag, same as D183 n-window 

reached 


A926 

Global 

read (2) 

SysTargetReached: Signal of the axis to the device control. The reference value was reached. 

The function is application-specific. The parameter is only functional for the applications listed 

below. 

Application 

Meaning 

Comfort reference value One of the following signals is active: D182, D185, D186, D308, 

D309, D462 


B.. Motor 


Motor-type: Indication of the motor name as text. 

2200h 0h 

B00 

Axis 

r=1, w=1 

For B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with data from the electronic name 

plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even 

if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile memory. For permanent 

changes, set B04 = 0 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. 

Note that in this case other parameters are no longer read from the name plate. A list of the 

relevant parameters can be found in B04. 

Default setting: ED302U 


ID 441727.02 143



04 


B.. Motor 


B01.0 Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat ® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's job number can 2201h 0h 

Axis 

be displayed in this parameter element. 

The structure of the full number is as follows: AAAAAA/BBB/CCC-DDD/XX 

read (3) AAAAAA: Job number 

Array 

BBB: Job call number 

CCC: Job remainder number 

DDD: Job item number 

XX: Sequential item number in the job 

The numeric parts are displayed in the elements of parameter B01. 








Only visible when B06 = 0:el. motor-type is set and the motor encoder is an EnDat ® -Encoder on 

X4 or X140. 

B01.1 

Axis 

read (3) 

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat ® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job call 

number can be displayed in this parameter element. 


AAAAAA: Job number 






2201h 

Array 

1h 









X4 or X140. 

B01.2 

Axis 

read (3) 

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat ® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job remainder 

numbercan be displayed in this parameter element. 








2201h 

Array 

2h 




ID 441727.02 144



04 


B.. Motor 







X4 or X140. 

B01.3 

Axis 

read (3) 

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat ® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's Job item 

number can be displayed in this parameter element. 








2201h 

Array 

3h 









X4 or X140. 

B01.4 

Axis 

read (3) 

Job data: If an ED/EK motor with EnDat ® encoder is connected to X4, the motor's sequential item 

number in the job can be displayed in this parameter element. 








2201h 

Array 

4h 









X4 or X140. 

ID 441727.02 145



04 


B.. Motor 


B02 

Axis, OFF 

Back EMF: Specifies the peak value of induced voltage between two phases at 1000 Rpm. When 

an effective value is specified for external motors, this must be multiplied by 1.41 before entry in 

B02. 

2202h 0h 

r=1, w=1 

B04 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 







Value range in V/1000rpm: 5.0 ... 60,0 ... 3000.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V/1000rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 00 80 00 hex 

Only visible with servo operation (B20 greater or equal to 64:Servo-control). 

El. motor-type: STÖBER motors of the ED, EK and EZ series are available with electronic single 

and multi-turn encoders. These encoders offer a special parameter memory. In all standard models 

STÖBER places all motor data in this memory including any existing halting brake ("electronic 

nameplate"). 

B04 is only used when B06 = 0 is set. 

With B04 = 0, B01 Job data is read. The other motor data can be entered as desired. The 

commutation is also internally affected. 

When B04 = 1 is set, the following parameters are read from the nameplate. 

B00, B01, B02, B10, B11, B12, B13, B16 bzw. B19, B17, B38, B39, B52, B53, B61, B62, B64, B65, 

B66, B67, B68, B70, B72, B73, B74, B82, B83 

The commutation is also internally affected. 

For this setting, F06 and F07 are also read if B07 = 0:el. motor-type is set. 

If a KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, U10 = 2:warning and U11 = 1 s will be set. 

With B04 = 1, the motor data are read from the encoder after each power-on. Any manual changes 

to motor data are only effective until the next power-off and power-on even when the changes are 

stored non-volatilely in Paramodule. For permanent changes to the motor data, set B04 = 0. Then 

store the changes with A00 = 1. 

Electronic nameplates of other motor manufacturers cannot be evaluated. 

NOTE 

Correct evaluation of the electronic nameplate after a change in parameter B04 is not ensured until 

after a device new start. 

0: Commutation; 

1: All data; 



X4 or X140. 

2204h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 146



04 


B.. Motor 


B05 Commutation-offset: Shift the encoder zero position in comparison to the motor. STÖBER 2205h 0h 

Axis, OFF 

motors with resolvers are set to B05 = 0 at the plant and checked. Normally a change in the B05 

parameter is not required. When phase test B40 produces a value B05 > 5° or B05 < 355°, a wiring 

r=1, w=1 or plug problem is probably the cause. 

With STÖBER motors with absolute value encoders, the commutation offset is written to the 

electronic nameplate at the plant and is read by the inverter during "startup." In this case, B05 is 

also set at the factory to 0. If B05 is changed, total offset = nameplate offset + B05 applies. 







Value range in °: 0.0 ... 0,0 ... 360.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2879.9 °); USS-Adr: 02 01 40 00 hex 


B06 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Motor-data: STÖBER motors of the ED, EK and EZ series are available with electronic single 

and multi-turn encoders. These encoders offer a special parameter memory. In all standard models 

STÖBER places the entire motor data in this memory including any existing halting brake 

("electronic nameplate"). 

2206h 

0h 

For B06 = 0, the data is read from the encoder after each power on according to the settings in B07 

(only for SDS 5000) and B04. Any manual changes in motor data only remain effective until the 

next power-off and power-on even when the changes are stored in Paramodule non-volatilely. 

Set B06 = 1 for motors without electronic nameplates. The default values of the motor data entered 

in the parameter list must then be checked and adjusted. The commutation offset can be autotuned 

with the action B40. The changes must then be stored with A00 = 1. 

Electronic nameplates of other motor manufacturers cannot be evaluated. 

NOTE 

Up to and including firmware status V 5.2, correct evaluation of the nameplate after a change in 

parameter B06 does not occur until a device new start. Starting with firmware status V 5.3, the 

nameplate is evaluated immediately. 

The parameter B06 only appears for inverters of the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000 series. 

0: El. motor-type; 

1: User defined; 


Only visible when the motor encoder is an EnDat ® -Encoder on X4 or X140. 

B07 

Axis, OFF 

Brake data: B07 is only used if B04 = 1 and F08 = 1 are set and is only available if a SDS 5000 

is configured. 

2207h 

0h 

r=1, w=1 

With B07 Brake data = 0, the data set in F06 Brake release time and F07 Brake application time are 

read on every power on from the encoder. Any manual changes to these brake data are therefore 

only effective until the next switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the 

Paramodul in non-volatile memory. This setting is useful if 

• the drive only has one brake or 

• the drive has two brakes and the one that has data saved in the electronic name plate features 

longer air and incidence times. 

ID 441727.02 147



04 


B.. Motor 


For B07 = 1, the parameters F06 and F07 can be manually set. This setting is useful if the drive has 

two brakes but the air and incidence times that are saved in the electronic name plate are the 

shorter ones. 

B10 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

B11 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

B12 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

B13 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

0: electrical name plate; 

1: arbitrary setting; 


Only available if B06 Motor data = 0:el. name plate and F08 Brake = 1:active. 

Motor-poles: Results from the nominal speed nNom [Rpm] and the nominal frequency f [Hz] of 

the motor. B10 = 2·(f · 60 / nNom). Correct entry of the number of poles is mandatory for the 

inverter to function. 







Value range: 2 ... 6 ... 20 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; (raw value:255 = 510); USS-Adr: 02 02 80 00 hex 

Nominal motor power: Nominal power in kW as per nameplate. If only the nominal torque Mn 

is known instead of the nominal power, B11 must be calculated from Mn [Nm] and the nominal 

speed n [Rpm] based on the following formula: B11 = Mn · n / 9550. 







Value range in kW: 0.120 ... 0,307 ... 500.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 02 C0 00 hex 

Nominal motor current: Nominal current in A as per nameplate. 







Value range in A: 0.001 ... 1,520 ... 327.670 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001A; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 03 00 00 hex 

Nominal motor speed: Nominal speed in Rpm as per nameplate. 







Value range in rpm: 0 ... 3000 ... 95999 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 03 40 00 hex 

220Ah 

220Bh 

220Ch 

220Dh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 148



04 


B.. Motor 


B14 

Axis, OFF 

Nominal motor voltage: Nominal voltage as per nameplate. Since, with asynchronous motors, 

the type of switching (Y/Δ) must be adhered to, make sure that the parameters B11 ... B15 match! 

220Eh 0h 

Value range in V: 0 ... 400 ... 480 

r=1, w=1 


Only visible with asynchronous machines (B20 less than 64:Servo-control). 

B15 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Nominal motor frequency: Nominal frequency of the motor as per nameplate. Parameters 

B14 and B15 specify the inclination of the V/F characteristic curve and thus the characteristic of the 

drive. The V/F characteristic curve determines the frequency (B15 f-nominal) at which the motor will 

be operated (B14 V-nominal). Voltage and frequency can be linearly increased over the nominal 

point. Upper voltage limit is the applied network voltage. STÖBER system motors up to a size of 

112 offer the possibility of star/delta operation. Delta operation with 400 V permits a power increase 

by the factor of 1.73 and an expanded speed range with constant torque. In this type of circuit, the 

motor requires more current. It must be ensured that: 

- The frequency inverter is designed for the corresponding power (PDelta = 1.73 · PStar). 

- B12 (I-nominal) is parameterized for the corresponding nominal motor current (IDelta = 1.73 · IStar). 

With quadratic characteristic curve (B21 = 1), nominal frequencies are limited via 124 Hz internally 

to 124 Hz. 

220Fh 

0h 







Value range in Hz: 0.0 ... 50,0 ... 1600.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 512000.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 02 03 C0 00 hex 


B17 

Axis, OFF 

T0 (standstill): Standstill torque M0 as per nameplate. Used, among others, as reference value 

for the torque and current limitation (C03 and C05). 

2211h 

0h 

r=1, w=1 







Value range in Nm: 0.000 ... 1,090 ... 2147483.647 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Nm; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 04 40 00 hex 


B18 

Axis 

read (3) 

Related torque: The parameter B18 shows the reference value for percentage of torque values 

(such as C03, C05, E62 and E66) in every control mode (B20). 

Value range in Nm: -8.72 ... 1,09 ... 8.72 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01Nm; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.22; USS-Adr: 02 04 80 00 hex 

2212h 

0h 

B19 

cos (phi): Cos (phi) as per nameplate. 

Value range: 0.500 ... 0,720 ... 1.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 04 C0 00 hex 


2213h 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

ID 441727.02 149



04 


B.. Motor 


B20 Control mode: Specifies the type of motor control.For servo motors, select 64:Servo-control. 2214h 0h 

Axis, OFF Asynchronous machines can be operated without speed feedback in the control modes 

0:V/f-control, 1:Sensorless vector control and 3:SLVC-HP. The selection 2:Vector control 

r=3, w=3 is available for asynchronous motors with feedback. 

NOTE 

- With control type "0:V/f-control," there is no current or torque limitation. Similarly, connection to a 

rotating motor is not possible ("capturing"). 

- Control type 64:Servo-control is not available with the FDS 5000 inverter. 

0: V/f-control; 

1: sensorless vector control; 

2: vector control; 

3: SLVC-HP; 

64: servo-control; 


B21 

V/f-characteristic: Switch between linear and square characteristic curve. 

2215h 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 

When the control mode is SLVC, only the linear characteristic curve format can be used. 

0: Linear; Voltage/frequency characteristic curve is linear. Suitable for all applications. 

1: Square; Square characteristic curve for use with fans and pumps. The characteristic curve is 

continued linearly starting at the nominal frequency (B15). 


B22 

Axis 

r=1, w=1 

V/f-factor: Offset factor for the increase of the V/f characteristic curve. The increase with V/F 

factor = 100 % is specified by V-nominal (B14) and f-nominal (B15). 

Value range in %: 90 ... 100 ... 110 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 05 80 00 hex 

2216h 

0h 

B23 

Axis 

r=1, w=1 

V/f-Boost: The term boost means an increase in voltage in the lower speed range whereby a 

higher startup torque is available. With a boost of 100 % the nominal motor current flows at 0 Hz. 

To specify the required boost voltage, the stator resistance of the motor must be known. 

For this reason, with motors without electronic nameplate, it is essential that B41 (autotune motor) 

be performed!! 

With STÖBER standard motors, the stator resistance of the motor is specified by the choice of 

motor. 

2217h 

0h 

Value range in %: 0 ... 10 ... 400 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 05 C0 00 hex 

Only visible with V/f control (B20 = 0). 

B24 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Switching frequency: The noise volume of the drive is affected by changing the switching 

frequency. Increasing the switching frequency increases losses, however. For this reason, the 

permissible nominal motor current (B12) must be reduced when the switching frequency is 

increased. With operation of a servo motor (B20 = 64), at least 8 kHz must be set. With a setting of 

4 kHz, an internal switch to 8 kHz is performed for servo operation. In some operating states, the 

switching frequency is changed by the inverter itself. The currently active switching frequency can 

be read in E151. 

2218h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 150



04 


B.. Motor 


NOTE 

The factory setting of this parameter depends on B20. With a servo controller, the value 8:8kHz is 

entered in B24. When an asynchronous machine (V/f controller, sensorless vector controller and 

vector controller) is used, B24 has the value 4:4kHz. 

4: 4kHz; 

8: 8kHz; 

16: 16kHz; 


B25 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

Halt flux: B25 specifies whether the motor with applied brakes remains electrified during halt and 

quick stop. Particularly useful for positioning. After a HALT, the motor remains fully electrified for 

the time B27. After expiration of this time, the electrification is lowered to the level specified in B25. 

When 0 % is the setting and the brake is applied (halt, quick stop), the motor goes dead and the 

flux is canceled. The advantage is a better thermal motor balance since the motor can cool off 

during the pause times. The disadvantage is the additional time for establishment of magnetization 

(rotor time constant, approx. 0.5 sec). The required time is determined automatically by the inverter 

and added to brake release time F06. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 100 


2219h 

0h 

B26 

Axis, OFF 

Motor encoder: Selection of the interface to which the motor encoder is connected. The encoder 

must be correctly parameterized in H.. for the particular interface (see encoder list in the H.. group). 

221Ah 

0h 

r=1, w=1 

NOTE 

Remember that the interfaces X120 and X140 are only available on the MDS 5000 and SDS 5000. 

The settings 3:X140-Resolver and 4:X120-encoder do not exist on the FDS 5000. 

0: inactive; 

1: BE-encoder; An incremental encoder which is connected to terminals BE4 and BE5 is used as 

motor encoder. The exact parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H10 ... H12. 

2: X4-encoder; The motor encoder is connected to interface X4. The exact parameterization of the 

encoder must be performed in H00 ... H02. 

3: X140-encoder; A encoder on the optional interface X140 is used as motor encoder. The exact 

parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H30 ... H32. 

4: X120-encoder; The motor encoder is connected to the optional interface X120. The precise 

parameterization of the encoder must be performed in H120 to H126. 

NOTE 

The interface X120 is only available with the "I/O terminal module, expanded (XEA 5000)" and 

"I/O terminal module, expanded (XEA 5001)" respectively! 


B27 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

Time halt-flux: In case of a reduced halt flux B25, the applied brake and active power pack of 

the full magnetization current is still maintained for the time B27. 

Value range in s: 0 ... 0 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1s; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 06 C0 00 hex 

221Bh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 151



04 


B.. Motor 


B28 Encoder gearfactor: When the encoder for motor control for setting B20 = 2 (control type = 221Ch 0h 

Axis, OFF 

vector control) is not mounted directly on the motor shaft, the gear ratio between motor shaft and 

the encoder must be specified here. 

r=2, w=2 It must apply: 

• B28 = Number of motor revolutions/number of encoder revolutions. 

• An SSI or an incremental encoder must be used. 

B28 can also assume negative values. Values whose amount is less than 1/10 may not be set. 

When B28 is not equal to 1.000, E09 indicates the encoder position and not the rotor position. 

Value range: -32.000 ... 1,000 ... 31.999 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; (raw value:10 Bit=1); USS-Adr: 02 07 00 00 hex 


B29 

Axis 

r=3, w=4 

Tolerate overcurrent: With applications which run close to the overcurrent threshold of the 

inverter, normal control procedures can cause undesired overcurrent malfunctions. For these 

cases, the parameter B29 makes it possible to tolerate a crossing of the overcurrent threshold for 

an adjustable number of current controller cycles. 

The parameter should not be changed until after the max. current value has been checked with an 

external current measuring instrument. 

221Dh 

0h 

CAUTION 

With B20 = 0:V/f-control and B20 = 1:sensorless vector control, B29 must be 0! 

Value range in current-ctrl cycles: 0 ... 0 ... 20 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1current-ctrl cycles; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 07 40 00 hex 

B30 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Additional motor-operation: Only possible with B20 = 0 (V/f control). For multi-motor 

operation. Permits the connection of an additional motor on the enabled inverter. This briefly 

reduces motor voltage to prevent an overcurrent switch-off. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

221Eh 

0h 


Only visible with V/f control (B20 = 0). 

B31 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Oscillation damping: Large motors can have a tendency to sympathetic vibration during no 

load. Increasing parameter B31 damps these vibrations with B20 = 2:SLVC. Values from 60 ... 100 

% are suitable for problematic drives. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 30 ... 100 

221Fh 

0h 


Only when B20 = 1:SLVC. 

B32 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

SLVC-dynamics: The reaction speed of the SLVC to changes in load can be influenced by B32. 

The highest dynamics are B32 = 100 %. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 70 ... 100 



2220h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 152



04 


B.. Motor 


B35 Offset raw-motorencoder: The parameter B35 is added to the encoder raw value or 

2223h 0h 

Axis 

accumulated encoder raw value. The results are indicated in E154 raw motor-encoder and E153 

accumulated raw-motor-encoder. 

r=3, w=3 The scaling of B35 depends on the motor encoder being used: 

- EnDat ® , SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions 

- Resolver: 65,536 LSB = 1 encoder revolution (i.e., MSB = 32,768 encoder revolutions) 

- Incremental encoder: 4 LSB = 1 increment 

MSB = Most Significant Bit 

LSB = Least Significant Bit 


Only visible when B26 is not set to 0:inactive. 

B36 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Maximum magnetisation: The parameter permits the motor to move within the basic speed 

range with reduced magnetization. With a light load, this can be used to reduce heatup of motor 

and inverter. The parameter should usually be set to 100 % (no reduction). 

NOTE 

The parameter is only effective in control type B20 = 2:Vectorcontrol. 

Value range in %: 50 ... 100 ... 100 


Only when B20 = 1:SLVC or 2:VC. 

2224h 

0h 

B38 

Motor temperature sensor: Select motor temperature sensor connected to X2. 

2226h 

0h 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 







0: PTC; A thermistor (PTC) is connected to X2 which increases its resistance suddenly to several 

times as many Ohms when the nominal response temperature is reached. 

1: KTY 84-1xx; A temperature sensor of type KTY 84 is connected to X2. At 100 °C it has a 

resistance of 1000 ohms. This temperature sensors makes it possible to perform an analog 

measurement of the motor temperature. The measurement is limited to one motor winding, 

which also restricts motor protection. Evaluation of a KTY sensor is not possible with inverters 

until HW200. The measured motor temperature is displayed in E12. The maximum permissible 

temperature for the motor must be parameterized in B39. 


B39 

Axis 

Maximum temperature of motor: If a higher motor temperature (E12) is measured than 

parameterized here, malfunction 41 is triggered. 

2227h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 







Value range in °C: 0 ... 145 ... 145 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 02 09 C0 00 hex 

Only if B38 is not equal to 0. 

ID 441727.02 153



04 


B.. Motor 


B40.0 Phase test & start: Writing a one starts the phase test action. It may only be used for servo 2228h 0h 

Global 

motors. A check is made to determine whether phases were mixed up when the motor was 

connected, whether the number of motor poles (B10) is correct and auto-tunes the commutation 

r=2, w=2 offset (B05). During the action the motor must be able to revolve freely. 

The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After B40.0 = 1 the enable must be switched HIGH. 

After the action was executed, the enable must be switched back to LOW. The result of the action 

can be read after removal of the enable in B05. 

B40.1 

Global 

read (2) 

B40.2 

Global 

read (2) 

B41.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

During this action the cycle time is internally set to 32 ms. The switch is made when the action is 

activated. 

WARNING 

Starting the action releases the motor brake. Since, due to the action, the motor is not sufficiently 

energized, it is unable to carry any loads (e.g., in a lifting system). For this reason the action may 

only be performed with motors which are not installed in a system. 


1: aborted; 

2: phase order; 

3: motor poles; 

4: commutation offset; 

5: test run; 



Process: Progress of the phase test in %. 


1: aborted; 

2: phase order; 

3: motor poles; 

4: commutation offset; 

5: test run; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A 00 01 hex 


Result: After conclusion of the phase test action, the result can be queried here. 

0: error free; The action was executed without errors and concluded. 

1: aborted; The action was aborted by turning off the enable. 

2: phase order; It was found that two phases were mixed up. 

3: motor poles; The determined number of poles is not the value in B10. 

4: commutation offset; The measured commutation offset is not B05. 

5: test run; A test run with the measured commutation offset could not be performed. 



Autotuning & start: Writing a one starts the Autotune motor action. It measures the resistance 

(B53) and the inductivity (B52) of the motor. The drive may move during this action. 

The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After B41.0 = 1, the enable must be switched to 

HIGH. After the action is executed, the enable must be switched back to LOW. The result of the 

action can be read in B52, B53 after the enable is removed. 


activated. 

When an asynchronous machine (B20 < 64) is being used, the action also autotunes the values for 

B54 leakage factor and B55 saturation coefficient. 

2228h 

2228h 

2229h 

1h 

2h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 154



04 


B.. Motor 


WARNING 





1: aborted; 


B41.1 

Process: Progress of autotuning the motor in %. 

2229h 

1h 

Global 

read (2) 


1: aborted; 


B41.2 

Result: After conclusion of the Autotune motor action, the result can be queried. 

2229h 

2h 

Global 

read (2) 


1: aborted; 


B42.0 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Optimize current controller & start: Writing a one starts the Optimize current controller 

action. This re-specifies the parameters for current controller gain (B64 ... B68). During the action, 

the drive revolves at approx. 2000 Rpm and may make clicking noises at regular intervals. The 

action may take up to approx. 20 minutes. The result of the action can be read in B64 ... B68 after 

the enable is removed. When the action is enabled on the device during local operation, the action 

can only be terminated with a very long delay. 

222Ah 

0h 


activated. 

WARNING 





1: aborted; 


Only visible with control types with current control (B20 = 64:Servo or 2:VC). 

B42.1 

Process: Progress of the current controller optimization %. 

222Ah 

1h 

Global 

read (2) 


1: aborted; 



B42.2 

Global 

read (2) 

Result: After conclusion of the current controller optimization action, the result can be queried 

here. 


1: aborted; 

222Ah 

2h 



ID 441727.02 155



04 


B.. Motor 


B43.0 Winding test & start: Writing a one starts the Winding test action. This checks the symmetry of 222Bh 0h 

Global 

the ohmic resistances of the motor windings. The enable must be LOW at the starting point. After 

B43.0 = 1, the enable must be switched to HIGH. After the action is executed, the enable must be 

r=2, w=2 switched back to LOW. 


1: aborted; 

2: R_SYM_U; 

3: R_SYM_V; 

4: R_SYM_W; 

5: POLAR_SYM_U; 

6: POLAR_SYM_V; 

7: POLAR_SYM_W; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 00 hex 

B43.1 

Process: Progress of the winding test in %. 

222Bh 

1h 

Global 

read (2) 


1: aborted; 

2: R_SYM_U; 

3: R_SYM_V; 

4: R_SYM_W; 

5: POLAR_SYM_U; 

6: POLAR_SYM_V; 

7: POLAR_SYM_W; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 01 hex 

B43.2 

Result: After conclusion of the winding test action, the result can be queried. 

222Bh 

2h 

Global 

read (2) 

0: error free: The action was executed without errors and concluded. 

1: Aborted: The action was aborted by turning off the enable. 

2: R_SYM_U: The resistance of phase U differs significantly from that of the other phases. 

3: R_SYM_V: Same as 2. 

4: R_SYM_W: Same as 2. 

5: POLAR_SYM_U: An asymmetry was determined when the polarity changed. 

6: POLAR_SYM_V: Same as 5. 

7: POLAR_SYM_W: Same as 5. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 0A C0 02 hex 

B45.0 

Optimize and start SLVC-HP: Writing a 1 starts the action Optimize and start SLVC-HP. 

222Dh 

0h 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

WARNING: 

The action accelerates the motor up to twice its nominal speed. The optimization function only 

provides suitable values when the load torque of the motor is sufficiently small. 

Only perform the action when the motor is adequately fastened and the motor shaft can rotate 

freely! 

The action optimizes these parameters: 

- B46 Feedback SLVC-HP, 

- B47 P-gain SLVC-HP and 

- B48 I-Gain SLVC-HP, 

Requirement: 

The enable must be low at the starting point. 

ID 441727.02 156



04 


B.. Motor 


1. Set B45.0 = 1. 

2. Switch enable to high. 

3. Wait until successful completion is displayed in B45.1 (B45.1 = 100 %). 

4. Switch enable to low again. 

The result of the action can be read after removing the enable in B46, B47 & B48. 


1: aborted; 



B45.1 

Process: Process of the Optimize SLVC-HP action in %. 

222Dh 

1h 

Global 

read (3) 


1: aborted; 



B45.2 

Result: The result can be queried here after completion of the Optimize SLVC-HP action. 

222Dh 

2h 

Global 

read (3) 


1: aborted; 



B46 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Feedback ASM Observer: This parameter affects the accuracy of the SLVC-HP. For values 

that are too large or too high, the stationary difference between the reference and actual speed 

increases. 

Note 

The amount of feedback is an option to be reported to the ASM observer just as the machine 

constants B54 leakage factor, B52 stator inductance and B53 stator winding resistance were 

determined. The smaller the feedback selected, the more the ASM observer depends on these 

constants. 

222Eh 

0h 

Value range: 1.001 ... 1,030 ... 1.500 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0B 80 00 hex 

B47 

Axis, OFF 

P-Gain of speed approximation ASM observer: This parameter affects 

the dynamic properties of the motor (especially the stability and overshoot 

behaviour of the speed). 

222Fh 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

Setting note 

The correct setting can be checked by means of the speed curve. If an encoder is present during 

commissioning, E15 should be considered as the actual speed, otherwise E91. 

B47 should not be smaller than 1% of B48. The drive can become unstable for values that are too 

small. The resulting vibration oscillates at the mechanical frequency. By increasing B47, overshoots 

in the speed can be dampened. Values that are too large lead to vibrations in the current and 

speed. 

ID 441727.02 157



04 


B.. Motor 


E07 n-post-ramp 

E91 n-motor or E15 n-motor-encoder ( B48 too small) 

E91 n-motor or E15 n-motor-encoder ( B47 too large) 

mech. frequency 

Value range: 0.000 ... 1,000 ... 1000.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0B C0 00 hex 

B48 

Axis, OFF 

I-Gain of speed approximation ASM observer: This parameter affects the dynamic 

properties of the motor. The larger B48 is, the faster the motor model can follow the actual speed. 

2230h 

0h 

r=3, w=3 

Setting note 


commissioning, E15 n-motor encoder should be considered, otherwise E91. 

If the motor can not follow the set speed ramp despite sufficiently large torque limits, B48 must be 

increased. Values that are too large lead to the fault 56:Overspeed. 

Value range: 1.000 ... 50,000 ... 50000.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: R32; (raw value:1LSB=1); USS-Adr: 02 0C 00 00 hex 

B52 

Axis, OFF 

Stator inductance: Inductance Lu-v of the motor winding in mH. Enter only for external motors. 

The value can be autotuned with the B41 action. 

2234h 

0h 

r=2, w=2 







Value range in mH: 0.001 ... 26,400 ... 2147483.647 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001mH; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 0D 00 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 158



04 


B.. Motor 


B53 

Axis, OFF 

Stator winding resistance: Stator winding resistance Ru-v of the motor winding in ohm. Enter 

only for external motors. The value can be autotuned with the B41 action. 

2235h 0h 

r=2, w=2 

B54 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

B55 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

B56 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 







Value range in Ohm: 0.001 ... 20,400 ... 2147483.647 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Ohm; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 02 0D 40 00 hex 

Leakage factor: Ratio of leakage inductance to total inductance "Ls" of the motor 

NOTE 

The default value is sufficient for most motors and applications. Adjustments may become 

necessary when an external motor is connected. In such cases the value can be autotuned with the 

action B41. However, do not make this adjustment before consulting with STÖBER 

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG. 

Value range: 0.010 ... 0,100 ... 0.300 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 0D 80 00 hex 


Magnetic saturation coefficient: The parameter specifies how much the motor is 

magnetically saturated at the nominal point. The parameter is important for the control accuracy of 

control type VC (B20 = 2:VC) in the field weakening area. 

NOTE 

The default value is sufficient for most motors and applications. Adjustments may become 

necessary when an external motor is connected. In such cases the value can be autotuned with the 

action B41. However, do not make this adjustment before consulting with STÖBER 

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH & Co. KG. 

Value range: 0.000 ... 0,750 ... 0.950 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 32767.000); USS-Adr: 02 0D C0 00 hex 


I-Gain of speed approximation ASM observer: This parameter affects the dynamic 

properties of the motor. The larger B48 is, the faster the motor model can follow the actual speed. 

Setting note 


commissioning, E15 n-motor encoder should be considered, otherwise E91. 

If the motor can not follow the set speed ramp despite sufficiently large torque limits, B48 must be 

increased. Values that are too large lead to the fault 56:Overspeed. 

2236h 

2237h 

2238h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 159


04 



B.. Motor 



E91 n-motor or E15 n-motor-encoder ( B48 too small) 

E91 n-motor or E15 n-motor-encoder ( B48 too large) 

Value range in %: 1.0 ... 21,0 ... 800.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 0E 00 00 hex 

B57 

Integral gain of voltage controller: I-Gain of voltage controller. 

2239h 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Influence on the controller 

The voltage controller controls the voltage reserve of the motor. Settings to B56 affect the formation 

of E169 reference flux and E165 Id-ref. For a 10V voltage difference, the I-part reduces the 

reference magnetisation by the value entered in B57 in 100 cycles (250 µs for each one). 

voltage controller 

E03 DC-linkvoltage 

80 % 

- 

B56 Proportional gain 

of voltage controller 

B57 Integral gain 

of voltage controller 

0 

PI-controller 

E169 

referenceflux 

magnetisation 

controller 

E165 

Id-ref 

E04 U-Motor 

E05 f1-Motor 

feed forward 

E168 Actual flux 

Note that the parameters E168 actual flux and E169 reference flux are not available in the standard 

application. 

ID 441727.02 160



04 


B.. Motor 


Setting note 

The correct setting can be checked using the curve of E165. Heavy vibrations when entering the 

field weakening area (E05 > C39) indicates control gains that are too large. 

E165 Id-ref (optimum curve) 

E165 Id-ref (curve for voltage controller parameters that are too large) 

basic speed range 

field weakening area 

C39 Cutoff frequency 

Value range in %: 1.0 ... 21,0 ... 800.0 


E05 f1-Motor 

B58 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Proportional gain of the magnetisation controller: Proportional gain of magnetisation 

controller. 


The magnetisation controller controls the reference magnetisation determined by the voltage 

controller and feed forward. Settings to B58 affect the formation of E165 Id-ref. For B58 = 100 % 

and a magnetisation difference of 1%, the P-part E165 Id-ref increases by 10 %. 

223Ah 

0h 



E169 

referenceflux 

magnetisation controller 

feed forward 

- 

E165 

Id-ref 

E04 U-Motor 

B58 Proportional gain of the 

magnetisation controller 

E05 f1-Motor 

feed forward 

- 

P-controller 



application. 

ID 441727.02 161



04 


B.. Motor 


Setting note 

The correct setting can be checked using the curve of E165. Heavy vibrations when entering the 

field weakening area (E05 > C39) indicates control gains that are too large. 

E165 Id-ref (optimum curve) 

E165 Id-ref (curve for magnetisation parameters that are too high) 



E05 f1-Motor 


Value range in %: 1.0 ... 12,0 ... 800.0 


B61 

T-Motor (thermal): Time constant of motor heatup in seconds. 

Value range in s: 0.1 ... 900,0 ... 3276.7 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 0F 40 00 hex 

223Dh 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

B62 

Motor inertia: Inertia J of the motor in kg cm². 

223Eh 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 







Value range in kg cm2: 0.0001 ... 0,4430 ... 214748.3647 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,0001kg cm2; Type: I32; (raw value:1LSB=0,0001); USS-Adr: 02 0F 80 00 hex 

B63 

Mmax/Mnom: Relationship of breakdown torque of the motor to its nominal torque. 

Value range: 1.0 ... 2,5 ... 8.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8.0); USS-Adr: 02 0F C0 00 hex 


223Fh 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

B64 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Integral time lq: Integral time of the current controller for the torque-generating share in msec. A 

setting under 0.6 msec causes an integral gain of 0 (corresponds to an infinite integral time). 








Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 10 00 00 hex 

2240h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 162



04 


B.. Motor 


Proportional gain torque controller: Proportional gain of the torque controller. 

2241h 0h 

B65 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

B66 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

B67 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

B68 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 







Value range in %: 0.0 ... 70,0 ... 800.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 10 40 00 hex 

Integral time Id: Integral time of the current controller for the flow-generating share in msec. A 

setting under 0.6 msec causes an integral gain of 0 (corresponds to an infinite integral time). 









Only visible when B20 is not 0:V/f-control. 

Proportional gain flux: Proportional gain of the flow controller. 







Value range in %: 0.0 ... 35,0 ... 800.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 02 10 C0 00 hex 


Kd-iq: D share of the torque controller. 







Value range in %: 0.0 ... 15,8 ... 595.8 



2242h 

2243h 

2244h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 163



04 


B.. Motor 


TW: Thermal time constant of the winding. 

2246h 0h 

B70 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

B72 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 








Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 11 80 00 hex 

TH: Is used for the thermal motor model. The parameter specifies in % the ratio of housing 

temperature and winding temperature at steady thermal factor. Example: During stationary 

operation at nominal point, the housing has a temperature of 110 °C, the winding 150 °C, and the 

ambient temperature is 25 °C. This results in: B72 = (110°C-25°C) / (150°C-25°C) * 100 % = 68 %. 

2248h 

0h 







Value range in %: 5.0 ... 55,2 ... 95.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:409600·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 02 12 00 00 hex 

B73 

tr0: Specifies the speed-independent friction of the motor. 

2249h 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 







Value range in Nm: -32.768 ... 0,031 ... 32.767 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001Nm; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 02 12 40 00 hex 

B74 

tr1: Specifies the speed-dependent friction of the motor. 

224Ah 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 







Value range in Nm/1000rpm: -3.2768 ... 0,0185 ... 3.2767 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,0001Nm/1000rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,0001·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 12 80 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 164



04 


B.. Motor 


I-max: Maximum current before the motor is de-magnetized. Specification in A. 

2252h 0h 

B82 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

B83 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

B92 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

B295 

Global 

read (3) 







Value range in A: 0.000 ... 6,080 ... 2147483.647 


n-max motor: Maximum permissible speed for the motor. Specification in Rpm. 







Value range in rpm: 0 ... 7000 ... 17 Bit 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 14 C0 00 hex 

Voltage limit of field weakening: Determines the entry point for field weakening. The 

inverter starts with field weakening when its output voltage reaches the part of A36 mains voltage 

entered in B92. 

Setting note 

The set value affects the dynamic properties of the drive: 

• the smaller the value, the better the dynamic properties. 

• the larger the value, the smaller the electrical consumption at an operating point. 

• 

• Value range in %: 55.0 ... 80,0 ... 95.0 

• 



Double transmission motor-encoder: Indicates whether double transmission monitoring is 

active for the SSI encoder used as the motor encoder. Evaluation of the encoder begins without 

double transmission monitoring but double transmission monitoring is automatically activated after 

a short time if the SSI encoder being used supports this. When monitoring is inactive, data security 

is reduced significantly. If the motor encoder is not an SSI encoder, the parameter has no meaning. 

NOTE 

The parameter can only be used when an SSI encoder is evaluated on the inverter. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 02 49 C0 00 hex 

Only visible when SSI or EnDat ® Encoder is used as the motor encoder. 

2253h 

225Ch 

2327h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 165



04 


B.. Motor 


B296 

Global 

Error-counter motor-encoder: Counts the number of tolerable errors of the motor encoder 

since the last device new start. 

2328h 0h 

read (3) 

NOTE 

The parameter can only be used when an SSI or EnDat ® encoder is evaluated on the inverter. 



B297 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Maximum-speed motorencoder: B297 can be used for a plausibility check of the motor 

encoder signals for EnDat ® and SSI encoders. The difference between two consecutive encoder 

positions are monitored. If this difference exceeds the speed specified in B297, a fault is triggered 

(37:n-feedback / double transmission, starting with V5.2: 37:Encoder / X4-speed or X120-speed). 

2329h 

0h 

NOTE 



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 02 4A 40 00 hex 


B298 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Error-tolerance motorencoder: Sets the tolerance of the inverter to errors of the motor 

encoder. This tolerance can be used to prevent a fault 37:Encoder when encoder errors occur 

sporadically. The inverter extrapolates an encoder value in this case. The parameter B298 specifies 

how many errors will be tolerated before the inverter malfunctions. 

Error evaluation is structured as shown below: 

Each arriving encoder value is checked. When an encoder error is determined, B299 and B298 are 

compared. If the error evaluation counter B299 is greater than or equal to B298, fault 37:Encoder is 

triggered. If B299 is less than B298, the error is tolerated. The counter status B299 is incremented 

by 1.0. 

If the arriving encoder value is correct, the error evaluation counter B299 is decremented by 0.1. 

Decrementation continues until the value 0 is reached. 

Example: With a setting in B298 of 1.0, one error is tolerated; at least 10 correct values must be 

determined before the next error so that a malfunction is not triggered. 

The following errors are tolerated: 

- EnDat ® -CRC 

- EnDat ® -Busy 

- SSI-double transmission 

- SSI-Busy 

- Violation of the maximum speed in B297 

With other encoder errors (e.g., wire break), a fault is triggered immediately regardless of B298. 

Error tolerance may negatively affect the quality of movement. The wiring should be checked when 

encoder errors occur frequently. 

232Ah 

0h 

NOTE 


Value range: 0.0 ... 1,0 ... 3.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 4A 80 00 hex 


ID 441727.02 166



04 


B.. Motor 


B299 

Global 

Error-evaluation motorencoder: Shows the current status of the error evaluation counter 

(see B298). 

232Bh 0h 

read (3) 

NOTE 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 02 4A C0 00 hex 


B300.0 

Brake test & start: 

232Ch 

0h 

Global, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

WARNING 

Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake test 

action releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in the case of a 

faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly in case of 

gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted to rotate 

in a particular direction. 

Information 

The brake test requires a motor encoder. Only the configured (slip-free) motor encoder is 

evaluated. 

The brake test checks to see whether the brakes can still provide the necessary stopping torque. 

For this purpose an encoder test is performed initially with the brake released. Then brake 1 is 

applied and the drive is taught a parameterizable testing torque in every permissible direction of 

rotation. If the drive determined a movement and the brake could not provide the required counter 

torque, the test is considered failed. The parameterizable testing torques are entered in the 

parameters B304.x (positive torque) and B305.x (negative torque). This is repeated for brake 2 (if 

brake 2 exists). Afterwards, the encoder is tested again. 

Information 

Remember that the motor torque is limited to the values in C03 and C05. If greater values are 

entered in B304.x and B305.x, they cannot be achieved. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether 

additional torque limits are also in effect. 

Information 

Remember that, with thrust axes, the torque to be provided by the motor for the direction of 

revolution in which loads are reduced is calculated as follows: 

M Parameter = M Brake - M Load 

M Parameter : Torque to be entered in B304.x or B305.x 

M Brake : Stopping torque to be provided by the brake 

M Load : Load torque 

Information 

During the brake test action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. This occurs when the action is 

activated. After conclusion of the action, the previous cycle time is used again. 

Prerequisites for the performance of a brake test: 

• You have parameterized the brake activation with the parameter F08 and F09. 

• In B304.0 you specified for brake 1 the torque which must stop the brake in the positive direction 

of revolution. 

• In B305.0 you specified for brake 1 the torque which must stop the brake in the negative direction 


• In B304.1 you specified for brake 2 the torque which must stop the brake in the positive direction 


ID 441727.02 167



04 


B.. Motor 


• In B305.1 you specified for brake 2 the torque which must stop the brake in the negative direction 


• If the drive may only revolve in one direction, you have restricted the direction of revolution for the 

test in parameter B306. 

• You have entered the angle of revolution in B307 which the drive evaluates as standstill. 

Information 

If you would like to perform the action and brake management considers a brake test mandatory 

(fault 72), the fault must be acknowledged before the action starts. However, the acknowledgment 

is only in effect for 5 minutes. If a valid brake test B300 is not performed during this time, the fault 

appears again. Once you have acknowledged the malfunction, you can continue with the perform 

brake test instruction. 

To perform the brake test, proceed as follows: 

1. Change to the device state Ready for switch on. 

2. Set the action B300.0 brake test & start to 1:active. 

3. Switch on the enable signal. ( 1 ) 

The inverter starts the brake test and the motor begins rotating. The drive may move during 

this process. 

4. Wait until B300.1 indicates the result 100 % and B300.2 indicates the result 0:error free. 

5. Switch the enable signal off. 

The brake test was performed successfully. 

If you did not achieve the result, parameter B300.2 will give you information on the cause. 

The inverter keeps an internal brake test memory with the last 20 events from B300.2 as well as the 

actually achieved stopping torques for brakes 1 and 2 in the positive and negative direction. When 

the result is 0: error free, these correspond to the values parameterized in B304.x and B305.x. If the 

values stored in the brake test memory are less than these, the brake test was not successful. 

The maximum positioning path for the brake test is approx. 45° in both directions. If a direction of 

revolution is restricted, the positioning path is 2 x 45° in the permitted direction. A stopping distance 

based on the torque and the inertia ratio is added in both cases. With coupled mechanics, you will 

have to include the gear ratio in the calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted in 

B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. Remember that this calculation is only valid 

for an intact brake. When the tested brake cannot provide the required stopping torque, the 

positioning path cannot be calculated. In this case, the inverter switches off within < 10 ms and 

activates a second brake (if one exists). The standstill of the drive is then primarily affected by the 

application time and functional efficiency of the second brake. If there is no second brake, the motor 

coasts down. 

( 1 ) If the enable signal is not switched on within 30 seconds, the function is interrupted 

automatically. 


B300.1 

Process: Progress of the brake test in %. 

232Ch 

1h 

Global 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 02 4B 00 01 hex 

read (2) 

ID 441727.02 168



04 


B.. Motor 


B300.2 Result: After conclusion of the brake test action, the result can be queried here. The achieved test 232Ch 2h 

Global 

torques (in positive and negative directions - for brakes 1 and 2) of the last 20 tests are stored in a 

brake test memory. These can only be indicated in POSITool. 

read (2) 

0: error free 

1: aborted. The brake test action was aborted. Reasons for the abortion may be: 

- The enable was switched off during the test. 

- The enable signal has not been switched on within 30 seconds. 

Perform the brake test again. 

2: maximal torque not reached for brake 1. During the test, brake 1 could not maintain the required 

torque. Perform the grind-brake function for brake 1 or replace brake 1. Then perform the brake 

test again. 

3: maximal torque not reached for brake 2. During the test, brake 2 could not maintain the required 

torque. Perform the grind-brake function for brake 2 or replace brake 2. Then perform the brake 

test again. 

4: Fault; Possible reasons for this message: 

- No brake is parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to the brake being used. 

- No encoder is parameterized. Determine whether an encoder exists and whether the 

connected motor can be operated in Servo control or Vector control control mode. Set B20 

accordingly. 

- Brake test has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state "Switch 

on inhibit"). 

5: encoder defective. Reasons for this message may be: 

- The brake(s) does/do not release. Test the brakes. 

- The encoder is defective. Contact the STÖBER hotline at +49 (0) 180 5 786323. 

6: E62/E66 torque limit; Possible reasons for this message: 

- C03/C05 is not set high enough. 

- Other application-dependent torque limits are in effect. 

- The device is overloaded. 


B301.0 

Brake 1 grind &start: 

232Dh 

0h 

Global, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

WARNING 

Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake 

grinding function releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in 

the case of a faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly 

in case of gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted 

to rotate in a particular direction. 

WARNING 

Danger due to movement of the drive. During the action, the motor rotates at approx. 20 Rpm and 

with the torque entered in C03 or C05. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether additional torque 

limits are also in effect. Ensure the following: 

- Before the function starts, make sure the drive is in a position in which it is permissible for it to 

move at this speed and torque. 

Information 

Note that this function can only be used with the SDS 5000 in conjunction with a BRS 5000 and 

encoder feedback. 

Information 

The brake grinding function can, unlike the function B300 Brake test, also be used on 

asynchronous motors without encoder. 

ID 441727.02 169



04 


B.. Motor 


Information 

Please note that the brake grinding function is defined for the STÖBER drive system (gear motor 

with brake and, if applicable ServoStop). For example, you cannot use the brake grinding function 

with brakes that are attached to the output power of the gear unit. It is essential to clarify the 

technical demands on a system from another manufacturer before you use this function. 

During the brake grinding function, the brake is repeatedly applied for approx. 0.7 s and then 

released for approx. 0.7 s while the motor is rotating with approx. 20 rpm. This grinds off any 

deposits from the friction surface which may affect the halting function. 

Action B301.0 starts the grind-brake function for brake 1. 

You can parameterize: 

- how often the brake is applied (B308) during rotation 

- how often the drive is to rotate in each direction (B309) 

- whether one direction of revolution is inhibited (B306) 

Information 

During the brake grinding action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. The change occurs when 

the action is activated. After the action is concluded, the previous cycle time is used again. 

Prerequisites for the use of the grind-brake function: 

• You have parameterized brake activation. 

• In B308 you have entered how often the brake is to be applied while rotating in one direction. 

• In B309 you have entered how often the drive is to grind in each direction. 

• In B306 you have specified whether one direction of rotation is inhibited. 

• The brake should be ground with its maximum holding torque. For normal motor-controller 

combinations this is the case with C03/C05 = ±200 %. 

• Check E62 and E66 to see whether other torque limits are also in effect. 

Information 




appears again. Once you have acknowledge the malfunction, you can continue with the 

brake grinding function instruction. 

To perform the brake grinding function, proceed as shown below: 


2. Set parameter B301.0 grind brake 1 & start to 1:active. 


The drive begins to revolve in accordance with the parameter specifications. 

4. Wait until parameter B301.1 indicates the result 100 % and parameter B301.2 the result 0: error 

free. 

5. Turn the enable off. 

You have successfully performed the brake grinding function. 

If you did not achieve the result, parameter B301.2 will provide you with information on the cause. 

The inverter maintains an internal memory with the operating times of the last 40 successful 

grinding procedures. All grinding procedures are counted in parameter E176 regardless of the 

result. 

The maximum positioning path is B308 x 0.5 motor revolutions. With coupled mechanics, you will 

have to include the gear ratio in your calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted 

in B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. 




ID 441727.02 170



04 


B.. Motor 


Process: Progress of the grind-brake 1 action in %. 

232Dh 1h 

B301.1 

Global 

read (2) 

B301.2 

Global 

read (2) 

B302.0 

Global, OFF 

r=2, w=2 


Result: After conclusion of the grind-brake 1 action, the result can be queried here. The operating 

times of the last 40 error-free grind-brake X actions are saved. This memory can only be indicated 

in POSITool. 

0: error free 

1: aborted. The brake grinding function was terminated. Reasons for the termination may be: 



Perform the brake grinding function again. 


- Brake 1 is not parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to 1:brake1 or 3:brake1and2. 

- Brake grinding 1 has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state 

"Switch on inhibit"). 


Brake 2 grind &start: 

WARNING 

Danger of injury or property damage due to defective motor halting brake. Starting the brake 

grinding function releases the motor brakes one after the other. During the encoder test and/or in 

the case of a faulty brake, the drive axis may move. Take special cautionary measures particularly 

in case of gravity-stressed axes. Restrict the direction of rotation in B306 if the drive is not permitted 

to rotate in a particular direction. 

WARNING 

Danger due to movement of the drive. During the action, the motor rotates at approx. 20 Rpm and 

with the torque entered in C03 or C05. Check E62 and E66 to determine whether additional torque 

limits are also in effect. Ensure the following: 

- Before the function starts, make sure the drive is in a position in which it is permissible for it to 

move at this speed and torque. 

Information 

Note that this function can only be used with the SDS 5000 in conjunction with a BRS 5000 and 

encoder feedback. 

Information 

The brake grinding function can, unlike the function B300 Brake test, also be used on 

asynchronous motors without encoder. 

Information 

Please note that the brake grinding function is defined for the STÖBER drive system (gear motor 

with brake and, if applicable ServoStop). For example, you cannot use the brake grinding function 

with brakes that are attached to the output power of the gear unit. It is essential to clarify the 

technical demands on a system from another manufacturer before you use this function. 

During the brake grinding function, the brake is repeatedly applied for approx. 0.7 s and then 

released for approx. 0.7 s while the motor is rotating with approx. 20 rpm. This grinds off any 

deposits from the friction surface which may affect the halting function. 

Action B302.0 starts the grind-brake function for brake 2. 

You can parameterize: 

- how often the brake is applied (B308) during rotation 

- how often the drive is to rotate in each direction (B309) 

- whether a direction of revolution is inhibited (B306) 

232Dh 

232Eh 

2h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 171



04 


B.. Motor 


Information 

During the brake grinding action, the cycle time is set internally to 32 ms. The change occurs when 

the action is activated. After the action is concluded, the previous cycle time is used again. 

Prerequisites for the use of the grind-brake function: 

• You have parameterized brake activation. 

• In B308 you have entered how often the brake is to be applied while rotating in one direction. 

• In B309 you have entered how often the drive is to grind in each direction. 

• In B306 you have specified whether one direction of rotation is inhibited. 

• The brake should be ground with its maximum holding torque. For normal motor-controller 

combinations this is the case with C03/C05 = ±200 %. 

• Check E62 and E66 to see whether other torque limits are also in effect. 

Information 




appears again. Once you have acknowledge the malfunction, you can continue with the 

brake grinding function instruction. 

To perform the brake grinding function, proceed as shown below: 


2. Set parameter B302.0 grind brake 2 & start to 1:active. 


The drive begins to revolve in accordance with the parameter specifications. 

4. Wait until parameter B302.1 indicates the result 100 % and parameter B302.2 the result 0: error 

free. 

5. Turn the enable off. 

You have successfully performed the brake grinding function. 

If you did not achieve the result, parameter B302.2 will provide you with information on the cause. 

The inverter maintains an internal memory with the operating times of the last 40 successful 

grinding procedures. All grinding procedures are counted in parameter E176 regardless of the 

result. 

The maximum positioning path is B308 x 0.5 motor revolutions. With coupled mechanics, you will 

have to include the gear ratio in your calculations. When both directions of revolution are permitted 

in B306, positioning in the positive direction occurs first. 




B302.1 

Process: Progress of the grind-brake 2 action in %. 

232Eh 

1h 

Global 

read (2) 


ID 441727.02 172



04 


B.. Motor 


B302.2 Result: After conclusion of the grind-brake 2 action, the result can be queried here. The operating 232Eh 2h 

Global 

times of the last 40 error-free grind-brake X actions are saved. This memory can only be indicated 

in POSITool. 

read (2) 

B304.0 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

B304.1 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

B305.0 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

0: fehlerfrei 

1: aborted. The brake grinding function was terminated. Reasons for the termination may be: 



Perform the brake grinding function again. 


- Brake 2 is not parameterized. Set F08 to 1:active and F09 to 2:brake2 or 3:brake1and2. 

- Brake grinding 2 has not been activated in the state "Ready for switch on" (e.g. in the state 

"Switch on inhibit"). 


Max-positive torque for B300: The maximum positive torque to be impressed during the 

B300 brake test action as a percentage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal 

torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is not maintained by the brake during 

the brake test, the action terminates with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for 

brake 1/2. Enter the maximum torque for brake 1 in B304.0 and in B304.1 for brake 2. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 200 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800%); USS-Adr: 02 4C 00 00 hex 

Only visible when F08 brake is not 0:inactive. 

Max-positive torque for B300: The maximum positive torque to be impressed during the 

B300 brake test action as a percentrage of motor standstill torque M0 for servo motors and nominal 




Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 200 



Max-negative torque for B300: The maximum negative torque to be impressed during the 





Value range in %: -200 ... -100 ... 0 



2330h 

Array 

2330h 

Array 

2331h 

Array 

0h 

1h 

0h 

B305.1 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

Max-negative torque for B300: The maximum negative torque to be impressed during the 





Value range in %: -200 ... -100 ... 0 



2331h 

Array 

1h 

ID 441727.02 173



04 


B.. Motor 


B306 

Axis 

Move direction for B300-B302: With axes which have only one mechanically permissible 

direction, all actions for B300 brake test, B301 grind-brake 1 and B302 grind-brake 2 are only 

performed in the specified direction. 

2332h 0h 

r=2, w=3 

B307 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

B308 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

0: positive and negative. Both directions are permitted. 

1: positive. Only the positive direction is permitted. 

2: negative. Only the negative direction is permitted. 



Standstill window for B300: The standstill window to be monitored in degrees during the 

B300 brake test action. 

If, during the brake test, the axis moves by more than the angle specified here, the action is 

terminated with the result B300.2 = maximum torque not achieved for brake 1/2. 

Value range in °: 0.0 ... 1,8 ... 360.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2879.9 °); USS-Adr: 02 4C C0 00 hex 


No of intervals for B301/B302: B308 contains how often the brake is to be applied per 

direction during the actions B301 brake1 grind and B302 brake 2 grind during a grinding procedure. 

Value range: 1 ... 5 ... 255 



2333h 

2334h 

0h 

0h 

B309 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

No of cycles for B301/B302: The repetitions of the grinding positioning movements in the 

positive and negative direction to be performed for actions B301 grind-brake 1 and B302 grindbrake 

2. 

Value range: 1 ... 1 ... 255 



2335h 

0h 

B310 

Global 

Brake management: Activates or deactivates brake management. Active brake management 

forces the regular performance of the B300 brake test action. 

2336h 

0h 

r=2, w=3 

Information 

When brake management is inactive, all E177 time passed since last brake test timers are cleared. 

0: inactive: Brake management is switched off. 

1: global; Brake management is globally active. Common monitoring is performed for all 

parameterized axes. The settings in F08 brake and B311 timeout for brake test B300 on axis 1 

apply to brake management, regardless of the number of configured axes. 

2: axis spec.: Brake management is active axis-specifically. An independent monitoring procedure 

is performed for each parameterized axis. This setting must be selected when several motors 

are connected to the inverter via POSISwitch ® . The settings must be made for brake 

management on each configured axis (e.g., in 1.F08 for axis 1 and in 3.F08 for axis 3). 


ID 441727.02 174



04 


B.. Motor 


B311 Timeout for brake test B300: Defines the time within which action B300 brake test should be 2337h 0h 

Axis 

performed. After the set time expires, the device indicates a message. After the set time expires for 

the second time, the device changes to the device fault state. Gerätezustand Störung. To avoid 

r=2, w=3 interrupting your production process, the malfunction is only generated if there is no enable. This 

makes it possible to delay the timeout. The fault must be acknowledged before the actions B300 

brake test, B301 brake 1 grind and B302 brake 2 grind can be performed. 

Value range in hours: 1 ... 168 ... 8760 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1hours; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 298261 hours); USS-Adr: 02 4D C0 00 hex 

Only visible when B310 exists and is not 0:inactive. 

C.. Machine 


C01 n-max: Maximum permissible speed. The speed is related to the motor shaft speed. When 

2401h 0h 

Axis C01*1.1 + 100 Rpm is exceeded, the inverter assumes fault "56:Overspeed." C01 may not exceed 

the maximum permissible motor speed B83. 

r=2, w=2 For positioning application the n-forwardfeed is limited to C01. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 03 00 40 00 hex 

C03 

Axis 

r=1, w=1 

C05 

Axis 

r=1, w=1 

C06 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

C08 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Max-positive Torque: Positive maximum torque in % of motor standstill torque M0 with servo 

motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. If the maximum torque is exceeded, the 

controller reacts with the message "47:M-MaxLimit." Depending on the operational status and the 

configuration being used, the actual, active, positive, maximum torque may differ from C03. The 

active, positive maximum torque can be monitored in E62. See also E22 and C06 (if present). 

Value range in %: 0 ... 150 ... 750 


Max-negative Torque: Positive maximum torque in % of motor standstill torque M0 with servo 

motors and nominal torque Mn for asynchronous motors. When the maximum torque is exceeded, 

the controller reacts with the message "47:M-MaxLimit" and E180 = 1. Depending on the 

operational state and the configuration being used, the actual, active, negative maximum torque 

may differ from C05. The active, negative, maximum torque can be monitored in E66. See also E22 

and C06 (if present). 

Value range in %: -750 ... -150 ... 0 


Factor torque limit: Weighting factor for the torque limits. The reference value can be selected 

for most standard applications via C130. When the parameterized torque limits C03, C05 specify 

other limit values, the smaller value becomes the active torque limit. C06 must be increased for 

some standard applications to allow torques over 200 % to take effect in C03, C05. 

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 200,0 ... 800.0 


Quick stop torque limit: Quick stop causes the inverter to switch to the torque limit set in C08. 

The limits specified in C03, C05 or other limits specified by the application are ignored during the 

quick stop. 

However, the effective torque limit can be automatically reduced if an operating limit of the inverter 

or the motor would be violated otherwise. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 150 ... 750 


2403h 

2405h 

2406h 

2408h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 175



04 


C.. Machine 


C20 Startup Mode: Specifies the startup behavior of the drive. 

2414h 0h 

Axis, OFF 0: normal; Default setting 

1: load start; For machines with increased break away torque. During the time time-load start 

r=3, w=3 

(C22), the motor torque is increased to torque load start (C21) and the speed is controlled with a 

sixteenth of the current ramp. 

2: cycle characteristic; A torque pre-control is performed, i.e. the inverter calculates the required 

torque from the specified motor-type (B00) and the ratio of the inertias J-load/J-motor (C30). 

This calculated torque is impressed on the drive. Forward feed is only calculated for acceleration 

or deceleration procedures. When reference value changes are less than the used ramp or the 

drive is in static operation, forward feed is deactivated. This provides a tolerance to reference 

value noise. 

3: capturing; A turning motor is connected to the inverter. The inverter determines the actual speed 

of the motor, synchronizes itself and specifies the appropriate reference value. 

4: cycle characteristic 2; A torque forward feed is performed with the setting 2:cycle characteristic 

(i.e., the inverter calculates the required torque from the specified motor type (B00) and the 

inertia ratio of load/motor (C30). This calculated torque is impressed on the drive. 

In comparison to 2:cycle characteristic, the drive tends to vibrate with this setting. 



C21 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Torque load start: meaning dependent on B20 control mode. 

B20 = 1: Sensorless vector control 

Only when C20 = 1 (load start). Determination of the torque for the load start. 

B20 = 3: SLVC-HP 

C21 is used to specify a constant load torque (friction, weight for vertical axes, etc.) for the load 

start at speeds < 5% B13 nominal speed. Reference value for C21 is B18. The torque specified in 

C21 always refers to the motor shaft. 

2415h 

0h 

M 

Mmotor 

C21 

n1 

n2 

load 

C21 is irrelevant for speeds > 5% B13 nominal speed. The total torque is made up of an 

acceleration torque and C21. The acceleration torque calculated from the mass moment of inertia 

of the complete system, the acceleration (D00 for the speed application, derivation of the reference 

speed for position applications) and the load torque. C21 has no influence on the brake torque. This 

is only calculated from the brake ramp. 

The effects of C21 are visible at E166 Iq-ref. If the actual load torque is significantly smaller than 

C21, this leads to a jerky start and large stationary speed differences. If C21 is significantly smaller 

than the load torque, the motor can not accelerate. 

ID 441727.02 176



04 


C.. Machine 


E166 Iq-ref 

acceleration 

torque 

C21 

brake torque 

acceleration 

constant travel 

brake 

Value range in %: 0 ... 100 ... 400 


C22 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Time load start: Only when C20 = 1. Time for the difficult startup with the torque defined under 

C21. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1s; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 32.8 s); USS-Adr: 03 05 80 00 hex 


2416h 

0h 

C30 

Axis 

J-load/J-motor: Ratio of the mass inertia of load to motor. The meaning is dependent on B20 

control mode. 

241Eh 

0h 

r=2, w=3 

B20 = 1: Sensorless vector control 

When using the SLVC control mode, C30 affects the dynamics of the torque limit. If the drive is 

operated in this control mode in cycle operation, C30 is used for the calculation of the feed forward. 

B20 = 3: SLVC-HP 

When using the SLVC-HP control mode, C30 has an influence on the calculation of the acceleration 

and brake torque in the low speed range (< 5 % nominal speed). D00, D01 and C21 also have an 

influence on the acceleration and brake torque. 

Value range: 0.0 ... 0,0 ... 512.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 512.0); USS-Adr: 03 07 80 00 hex 

C31 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Proportional gain n-controller: Proportional gain of the speed controller. With C31 = 100 % 

and a speed deviation of 32 Rpm, the P-share of the speed controller supplies the standstill 

moment M0 as reference value to the current or torque controller. 

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 10,0 ... 800.0 


241Fh 

0h 

C32 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Integral time n-controller: Time constant of the I share in speed controller. A short integral 

time causes a high integration speed and thus increases the "static rigidity" of the drive. With 

dynamic processes, a short integral time can cause overswinging in the target position. In this case, 

increase C32. The I-controller is deactivated with C32 < 1 msec. 

At C31 = 100 % and a speed deviation of 32 Rpm, the I share of the speed controller supplies the 

nominal motor torque for the current or speed torque controller precisely after the integral time C32. 

2420h 

0h 



ID 441727.02 177



04 


C.. Machine 


C33 

Axis 

Low pass reference speed: Reference value smoothing. C33 should be increased in case of 

reference value noise, vibrating mechanics or large external masses. 

2421h 0h 


r=3, w=3 Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.12; USS-Adr: 03 08 40 00 hex 

C34 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

C36 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

C37 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

C38 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

n-motor low pass: Smoothing time constant for the measured motor speed in msec. Any noise 

during the measurement of the motor speed causes disagreeable noise and an additional thermal 

motor load. C34 helps to reduce speed noise and thus improve the smoothness of running. C34 

should be kept as low as possible since an increase of C34 reduces the achievable controller gain 

C31 and thus the dynamics. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.6; USS-Adr: 03 08 80 00 hex 

Reference torque low pass: Smoothing time constant for the torque reference value on the 

output of the speed controller in msec. Is used to suppress vibration and resonance. The effect of 

torque smoothing is dosed with C37. 



Reference torque filter: The torque reference value is generated on the output of the speed 

controller from two components whose relationship is affected by C37. 

• Direct output of the PI speed controller (share corresponds to 100 %-C37). 

• Smoothed output of PI speed controller (share corresponds to C37). 

For maximum dynamics, set C37 = 0 %. The reference value low pass is cancelled out with the 

time constant C36. C37 can be increased to 100 % to attenuate the vibrations. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 25 ... 100 


Derating speed-controller: derating of the speed controller in the field weakening area. 

C38 specifies what percentage of the speed controller gain set in C31 is still used for 200 % B15 

nominal frequency. Derating is also performed for the I-Gain (ki = C31/C32). Derating starts with 

initial field weakening (E05 f1-Motor > C39 cutoff frequency) and reaches the value for double the 

nominal frequency entered in C38. 

Derating 

2422h 

2424h 

2425h 

2426h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

1 

C38/100 

C32 integral time n-ctrl 

C31 proportional 

gain n-control 

C39 2*B15 

X 

X 

Proportional 

gain 

Integral 

gain 

Speed controller 


E91 n-Motor 

- 

Mmax 

PI controller 

Mmin 

E166 Iq-ref 

ID 441727.02 178



04 


C.. Machine 


Example: 

C31 = 10 %, C32 = 50 msec, C38 = 50 % 

Controller gains for E05 < C39: 

kp = C31 = 10 % 

ki = C31/C32 = 0,2 %/msec 

Controller gains for E05 = 2 * B15: 

kp = C31 = 5 % 

ki = C31/C32 = 0,1 %/msec 

C39 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Value range in %: 25.0 ... 100,0 ... 800.0 


Cutoff frequency: Determines the cutoff frequency of the magnetisation feed forward. 


The feed forward consists of a magnetisation frequency characteristic curve that controls the 

reference magnetisation (independent of the motor voltage). If E05 < C38 applies, the feed forward 

is constant. Magnetisation is reduced for larger frequencies. C38 also has some influence on the 

tracking of the speed controller gain with C39. 


E04 U-Motor 


E169 

reference-flux 

magnetisation 

controller 

E165 

Id-ref 

2427h 

0h 

E05 f1-Motor 

feed forward 

Magn. 

f 



application. 

Setting note 

The selection of C31 is determined by A36 supply voltage. A reference value for C31 can be 

calculated as follows: C31 = A36/B14 * B15 * 0.8. 

E165 Id-ref (C39 = Default) 

E165 Id-ref (changes to C39) 




Value range in Hz: 0.0 ... 50,0 ... 200.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 200.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 03 09 C0 00 hex 

E05 f1-Motor 

ID 441727.02 179



04 


C.. Machine 


C40 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

n-window: With applications without brake control (e.g., fast reference value), "standstill reached" 

is valid within a window of ±C40. This signal means "quick stop concluded" for the device controller. 

Value range in rpm: -8191 ... 30 ... 8191 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 03 0A 00 00 hex 

2428h 0h 

C61 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Speed limiter: Switches the speed limiter on. When n-limiter is on, the inverter still limits only the 

maximum speed and is in torque control mode. Remember that the parameter is automatically set 

by the comfort reference value application when torque control is parameterized. You must set C61 

in the technology controller application if you want to use torque control. Torque control is not 

possible for any of the other applications. 

0: inactive; Normal speed control (possible with higher-level position control, see C62). 

1: active; Torque control with speed limiter. 


243Dh 

0h 

C62 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Position ctrl: Switch position control on and off. Position control is used, for example, for 

positioning or precise-angle synchronous operation. With all positioning applications (also without 

encoder), C62 = 1 is required. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; position control 

243Eh 

0h 


C130 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

Torque limit source: Selection of the source for the signal of the external torque limit "M-Max." 

It can be permanently specified that the signal is supplied by the analog inputs or the fieldbus. 

With C130 = 4:Parameter, the (global) parameter C230 is used as the signal source. The resulting 

torque limit is indicated in C330. 

0: 0 (zero); 

1: AE1; 

2: AE2; 

3: AE3; 

4: parameter; 

2482h 

0h 


C230 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Torque limit: Specification for the torque limit (absolute value) via fieldbus if the signal source is 

C130 = 4:Parameter. 

Value range in %: -200 ... 200 ... 200 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200%); USS-Adr: 03 39 80 00 hex 

24E6h 

0h 

C330 

Axis 

read (2) 

Torque limit: Indication of the value of the Torque Limit signal on the interface for calculation of 

the torque limits. 

The internal, currently effective torque limits also depend on the fixed torque limits C03 and C05 as 

well as any possible torque limit due to the i²t model. The current limits are indicated in E62 and 

E66. 

254Ah 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200%); USS-Adr: 03 52 80 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 180



04 


D.. Reference Value 


D00 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Acceleration ramp: Acceleration ramp of the speed ramp generator. 

Value range in ms/3000rpm: 1 ... 100 ... 49152000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms/3000rpm; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.10; USS-Adr: 04 00 00 00 hex 

2600h 0h 

D01 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

D02 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

D80 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Deceleration ramp: Deceleration ramp of the speed ramp generator. 



Speed (max.ref.value): D02 is used to scale a speed reference value. A reference value is 

specified in Volt or % via an analog input or via the fieldbus. This relative reference value is 

multiplied by D02 to obtain a reference speed in Rpm. 

In the application quick reference value, D02 is the reference value speed at 10 V on the analog 

input if the scaling of the analog input corresponds to the default setting. In the application quick 

reference value, D02 does not act as speed limitation. 

When the application includes a complete reference value characteristic curve, D02 is then the 

speed when reference value specification = D03. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 04 00 80 00 hex 

Ramp smoothening: An acceleration or braking procedure is extended during ramp 

smoothening by the time specified in D80. At the beginning of an acceleration or braking procedure, 

the ramp is linearly adjusted from 0 to the full value in the time D80. Near the end of the procedure, 

the ramp is adjusted during this time from the full value to 0 (trapezoid-shaped progression of the 

ramp). This corresponds to conventional jerk limitation. The speed has a parabola-shaped 

progression. With D80 = 0, quick stop (e.g., due to a malfunction) and during a load start, ramp 

smoothening is not active. The ramp which the ramp smoothening affects is dependent on the 

application selected (see list below). 

NOTE 

The ramp is only extended by D80 when ramp smoothening, ramp and reference value change are 

adapted to each other in such a way that the maximum ramp value can be achieved (trapezoidshaped 

progression of the ramp). 

In addition, all desired lengths of ramp smoothening times cannot be set. The maximum ramp 

smoothening time is first specified by the value range of D80 (maximum of 10000 ms). For long 

ramps, this range is restricted to the value 49152000 / current ramp. 

2601h 

2602h 

2650h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

Application 

Fast reference value 

Technology controller 


Parameter 

D00, D01 

D00, D01 

Depending on the valid main reference value 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 04 14 00 00 hex 

D81 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Quick stop deceleration (decel-q): Quick stop ramp. Takes effect when a quick stop is 

executed (also for fault reaction = quick stop). The drive is decelerated with the braking ramp set 

here. 


2651h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 181



04 




D93 Reference value generator: For commissioning and optimization of speed control. If D93 = 265Dh 0h 

Global 

0:bipolar, then +D95 and -D95 are specified alternately. If D93 = 1:unipolar, then 0 rpm and D95 

are specified alternately. Each speed specification remains valid for the time D94. 

r=1, w=1 

0: bipolar; Normal reference value selection. 

1: unipolar; ±D95 is cyclically specified as reference value. The time can be set in D94. 


D94 

Ref. val. generator time: The reference value changes each time this period of time expires. 

265Eh 

0h 

Global 

Value range in ms: -32768 ... 500 ... 32767 

r=1, w=1 


D95 

Ref. val. generator speed: Speed reference value of the reference value generator. 

265Fh 

0h 

Global 

Value range in rpm: -8191 ... 250 ... 8191 

r=1, w=1 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 8191 rpm); USS-Adr: 04 17 C0 00 hex 

D96.0 

Global 

r=1, w=1 

Reference value generator & start: Writing a one starts the reference value generator 

action. A square-shaped reference value is specified for the motor. The action can only be used 

with control modes servo-control and vector control (control mode B20). The enable must be LOW 

at the starting point. After D96.0 = 1, the enable must be switched HIGH. Any existing brake is 

automatically released. 

2660h 

0h 

WARNING 





1: aborted; 


D96.1 

Process: Shows the progress of the reference value generator action in %. 

2660h 

1h 

Global 

read (1) 


1: aborted; 


D96.2 

Result: Shows the result of the reference value generator action. 

2660h 

2h 

Global 

read (1) 


1: aborted; 


D100 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Reverse source: The Reverse (direction of revolution) signal reverses the direction of revolution 

of the motor. 

The parameter D100 specifies the source for the Reverse signal. 

Possible selections 0:low and 1:high are the same as fixed values. With D100 = 3:BE1...28:BE13- 

inverse , the Reverse signal can be executed via the selected binary input. With D100 = 2:Parameter, 

the control byte or the control word of the selected application is used as the signal source. 

This setting is provided for fieldbus operation. The control word can be assigned to various 

parameters in the different applications. The list below shows the control words for the different 

applications. 

The Reverse signal can be monitored in D300 - regardless of the parameterized signal source. 

2664h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 182



04 




Application Parameter Bit 

Fast reference value D210 0 

Technology controller G210 0 

Comfort reference valuew D210 0 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 



D101 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

External fault source: Selection of the source for the "44:ext.Fault" signal (external fault). 

With D101 = 2:Parameter, the control word is used as the signal source. This is designed for 

operation with a fieldbus system. The control word can be assigned to various parameters in the 

different applications. The list below shows the control words for the different applications. 

The signal can be directly monitored on the block input via D301. 


Fast reference value D210 1 


Comfort reference value D210 1 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


2665h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 183



04 




11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 



D130 

Axis, OFF 

r=1, w=1 

Reference value source: Selection of the source for the "relative reference value" signal. The 

signal can be permanently specified as supplied by the analog inputs or the fieldbus. With D130 = 

4:Parameter, the (global) parameter D230 is used as the signal source. It can be written for use 

with a fieldbus system. 

0: 0 (zero); 

1: AE1; 

2: AE2; 

3: AE3; 

4: parameter; 

2682h 

0h 


D180 

Axis 

read (1) 

Standstill: The signal is 1:active when the speed actual value is within the window of ±C40. With 

fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 0. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

26B4h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: B; USS-Adr: 04 2D 00 00 hex 

D181 

Axis 

read (1) 

Reference value reached: Binary signal is 1:active when the input and output of the ramp 

generator differ by a maximum of 10 Rpm after expiration of the ramp. In the application for the 

"comfort reference value," the signal is also 1:active when the output of the motorised pot is 

constant. 

The signal can only be set when the enable has been given. 

With fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 1. 

26B5h 

0h 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


ID 441727.02 184



04 




D182 Torque limit: Binary signal, assumes the value "1" when the required torque exceeds the 

26B6h 0h 

Axis 

maximum permissible torque (C03, C05, C330, C331, C332, C333). D182 triggers for negative and 

positive limit. When positive and negative limit must be distinguished between, use E180 and E181. 

read (1) To distinguish between motoring and generating limits, E186 and E187 must be read. 

With fieldbus operation, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 2. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


D200 

Global 

read (2) 

Speed reference value status word: This byte contains status signals of the application. 

With the application for the fast reference value, only bits 0 to 2 are used. Bits 3 to 15 can only be 

used with the application for comfort reference value. The parameter which is specified for the bit 

names indicates the individual parameter in which the signals can also be viewed. 

26C8h 

0h 

Bit 0: Standstill (D180). The actual motor speed has reached the value 0 Rpm ±C40. 

Bit 1: Reference value reached (D181): The ramp generator has reached its reference value. 

Bit 2: Torque limit (static) (D182). The positive or negative torque limit is reached. 

Bit 3: Status positive T-limit (E180): The positive torque limit has triggered with the high level. 

Bit 4: Status negative T-limit (E181): The negative torque limit has triggered with the high level. 

Bit 5: Status motoring T-limit (E186): The motoring torque limit has triggered with the high level. 

Bit 6: Status generating T-limit (E187): The generating torque limit has triggered with the high 

level. 

Bit 7: PID upper limit (G181): With the high level, the PID controller has reached the value in G08 

on the output. 

Bit 8: PID lower limit (G182): With the high level, the PID controller has reached the value in G09 

on the output. 

Bit 9: Actual value reached (D183): With the high level, the motor speed has reached the 

reference value specification ±C40. 

Bit 10: Ref. value prohibited (D184):With the high level, a reference value is specified in prohibited 

direction of rotation. 

Bit 11: Max. speed limit reached (D185): With the high level, the reference value has reached the 

positive speed limit (with torque control D336, speed control D338). 

Bit 12: Min. speed limit reached (D186): With the high level, the reference value has reached the 

negative speed limit (with torque control D337, speed control D339). 

Bit 13: Motorised pot step reached (D187): With the high level, no change takes place in the 

motorized pot reference value. 

Bit 14: Motorised pot lim reached (D188): With the high level, the motorized pot reference value has 

reached the value in D45 or D46. 

Bit 15: Zero ramp reached (D189): With the high level, the ramp generator has reached the value 0. 


D210 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

Speed reference value control word: This word contains reference value signals to the 

application. In the application for the fast reference value, only bits 0 and 1 can be used. Bits 2 to 

13 are exclusively for use with the application for the comfort reference value. 

The parameter which is specified with the bit names specifies the indication parameter which shows 

the signal regardless of its source. 

26D2h 

0h 

Bit 0: Reverse (D300): With the high level, the reference value is negated before the addition with 

n-reference high resolution takes place. 

Bit 1: External fault (D301): With the high level, the fault "44:externalfault1" is triggered. 

Bit 2: Stop (D302): With the high level, reference value 0 is specified and the motor stops. 

Bit 3: Limit switch+ (D303): With the high level, an event is triggered. In the standard, the inverter 

switches to the fault state. 

ID 441727.02 185



04 




Bit 4: Limit switch- (D304): With the high level, an event is triggered. In the standard, the inverter 

switches to the fault state. 

Bit 5: Jog enable (D305): If the drive reaches standstill (speed in window ±C40) with an active 

Stop signal, jogging mode is enabled with the high level. 

Bit 6: Jog+ source (D306): When jogging mode is enabled, the jog reference value signal is output 

unchanged with the active signal. 

Bit 7: Jog- source (D307): When jogging mode is enabled, the jog reference value signal is output 

negated with the high level. 

Bit 8: Positive blocking (D308): With the high level, no positive reference value is processed. 

Bit 9: Negativ blocking (D309): With the high level, no negative reference value is processed. 

Bit 10: Torque switch (D310): The signal is used to switch between the absolute torque limits. With 

the low level, torque limit is valid (C330). With the high level, torque limit 2 is active (C331). 

Bit 11: Master / slave switch (D311): With the high level, the master reference (D340) is active. 

Bit 12: Speed / torque switch (D312): The signal is used to switch between speed and torque 

control. With the low level, speed control is active. With the high level, torque control is used. 

Bit 13: Additional enable 2 (D313): The Additional enable 2 signal is logically linked with the 

reference value enables. With the high level, one of the reference value enables must also 

exist before the drive is enabled. 

Bit 14: Reserved 

Bit 15: Reserved 

D230 

Global 

r=2, w=2 

D231 

Global 

r=2, w=2 



n-reference value relative: Relative speed reference value of the application quick reference 

value as related to D02. Is added to high-resolution speed reference value D231. The reverse 

signal (D100, D210.0) negates D230. 

Value range in %: -200.0 ... 0,0 ... 200.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=200,0%); USS-Adr: 04 39 80 00 hex 

n-reference value high resolution: High-resolution speed reference value of the application 

quick reference value. The function differs in the applications "fast reference value" and "comfort 

reference value." 

Fast reference value: 

The reference value Is added to relative reference value D230. The reverse signal (D100, D210.0) 

has no effect on D231. 

26E6h 

26E7h 

0h 

0h 


For an exact description of the n-reference high resolution signal, please see the application 

description of the comfort reference value, ID 441883. 

Value range in rpm: -131072.000 ... 0,000 ... 131072.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 04 39 C0 00 hex 

D300 

Axis 

read (2) 

Reverse: Indicator parameter for the current signal state on the input of the speed block (reverse). 

D300 shows the state regardless of the source selected in D100. The following table shows the 

source for fieldbus operation (D100 = 2:parameter). 


Fast refernece value D210 0 


Comfort reference value D210 0 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

272Ch 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 04 4B 00 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 186



04 




D301 

Axis 

External fault: Indicator parameter for the current signal state on the input of the speed block 

(extFault). D301 shows the status regardless of the source selected in D101. 

272Dh 0h 

0: inactive; 

read (2) 

1: active; 

D330 

Axis 

read (2) 

D331 

Axis 

read (2) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 04 4B 40 00 hex 

n-reference value relative: Indicator parameter for the current signal value on the input of the 

speed block (RVrelat.). D330 shows the value regardless of the source selected in D130. 

When weighted with D02, this signal provides one component of the speed reference value. The 

high-resolution speed reference value (RefVal) is then added to this. 


n-reference value high resolution: Indicator parameter for the current signal value on the 

input of the quick reference value block (RefVal). 

The value of D331 is added to the relative reference value. 


274Ah 

274Bh 

0h 

0h 

E.. Display Value 


I-Motor: Indicates the current motor current as amount in amperes. 

2800h 0h 

E00 

Global 

read (0) 

E01 

Global 

read (0) 

E02 

Global 

read (0) 

E03 

Global 

read (1) 

E04 

Global 

read (1) 

E05 

Global 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1A; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.3; USS-Adr: 05 00 00 00 hex 

P-Motor: Indicates the current active power of the motor in kW. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 3435.973 kW); USS-Adr: 05 00 40 00 

hex 

M-Motor filtered: Indication of the current motor torque in Nm. With asynchronous types of 

control as related to the nominal motor torque, with servo types of control as related to the standstill 

moment M0. Smoothed for indication on the device display. Access to unsmoothed amount is 

possible with E90. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Nm; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.7; USS-Adr: 05 00 80 00 hex 

DC-link-voltage: Indication of the current DC link voltage. 

Value range with single-phase inverters: 0 to 500 V, with three-phase inverters 0 to 800 V. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 00 C0 00 hex 

U-Motor: Chained effective voltage present on the motor. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 2317.0 V); USS-Adr: 05 01 00 00 hex 

f1-Motor: Frequency of the voltage applied to the motor. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1Hz; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:2147483647 = 512000.0 Hz); USS-Adr: 05 01 40 00 hex 

2801h 

2802h 

2803h 

2804h 

2805h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 187



04 




E06 

Global 

n-reference: With speed operation. Indication of the current speed reference value as related to 

the motor shaft. 

2806h 0h 

read (0) 

E07 

Global 

read (1) 

E08 

Global 

read (0) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 01 80 00 hex 

n-post-ramp: Indication of the current speed reference value as related to the motor shaft after 

the ramp generator and the n-reference value lowpass. In operating mode position (C62 = 1), the 

sum of output position control and n-forwardfeed (= speed control reference value) is indicated. 


n-motor filtered: Indication of the current motor speed. Smoothed for indication on the device 

display. Access to the unsmoothed motor speed is possible with E91. When the drive is operated 

without feedback, this speed is determined mathematically via the motor model (in this case, the 

actual motor speed may differ from the calculated speed). 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 02 00 00 hex 

2807h 

2808h 

0h 

0h 

E09 

Global 

read (0) 

Rotor position: Position of the motor shaft and the motor encoder respectively. With absolute 

value encoders, the encoder position is continuously read from the encoder and entered in this 

parameter. The value range is limited to ±128 U. This position is available for all operating modes. 

With types of control without motor encoders, E09 is simulated (not precise). The display shows 

whole motor revolutions with 3 positions after the decimal point. The full resolution of 24 B bit/U is 

supplied via fieldbus. Accuracy and maximum value range varies with the encoder. 

When E09 is evaluated by a higher-level controller for position acquisition, the following must be 

true: 

• The encoder increment number must be an even power of two. 

• E09 must be read cyclically 

• The position must be accumulated on the controller. 

2809h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:24 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 02 40 00 hex 

E10 

Global 

read (1) 

AE1-Level: Level of the signal available on analog input 1 (X100.1 - X100.3) (without 

consideration of F11, F12). To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter 

when the controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered with the opposite sign in F11. 


280Ah 

0h 

E11 

Global 

read (1) 

AE2-Level: Level of the signal on analog input 2 (X100.4 - X100.5) (without consideration of F21, 

F22). To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller 

specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F21 with the opposite sign. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 05 02 C0 00 hex 

280Bh 

0h 

E12 

Motor temperature: Temperature measured on X2 by the motor temperature sensor. 

280Ch 

0h 

Global 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 05 03 00 00 hex 

Only if B38 is not equal to 0. 

ID 441727.02 188



04 




E14 Chargerelay: Status of the internal charging relay. Active means that the relay contact is closed 280Eh 0h 

Global 

and the charging resistors from the power network to the DC link are bypassed. When the network 

voltage is turned on, the charging relay remains open at first. It closes when the DC link is charged 

read (2) up via the charging resistors. 

NOTE 

Make sure that the charging relay contacts are open (E14 = 0:inactive) before you connect the 

power supply. Particularly in a DC link network, remember that the charging relays of all connected 

inverters are open before the power supply is connected. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


E15 

Global 

n-motor-encoder: Speed calculated from the motor encoder specified in B26. This indication 

also functions when the control type in B20 does not require an encoder. 

280Fh 

0h 

read (1) 


E16 

Global 

Analog-output1-level: Indication of the level on the analog output (X100.6 and X100.7). ±10 V 

corresponds to ±16384. 

2810h 

0h 

read (1) 


E17 

Global 

Relay1: Status display of relay 1. The function of the relay contact on X1.1 and X1.2 (NO) 

depends on the firmware version of the inverter. 

2811h 

0h 

read (1) 

Firmware up to and including V 5.5A 

Status display 1:active means that the relay contact is closed. There is no malfunction. 

Firmware beginning with V 5.5B 

The function of relay 1 depends on parameter F10 Relay 1 function. The basic setting of parameter 

F10 is 0: No malfunction. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 04 40 00 hex 

E18 

Global 

read (1) 

Relay2: MDS 5000 and FDS 5000: state of relay 2 (motor halting brake, X2.1, X2.2). Active 

means that the relay contact is closed and the motor halting brake is released. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

2812h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 04 80 00 hex 

E19 

Global 

Binary inputs: Indicates level of all binary inputs as binary word. Bit 0 = enable, Bit 1 = BE1 to 

Bit 13 = BE13 and so on. 

2813h 

0h 

read (2) 


E20 

Global 

Device utilisation: Indicates the current utilization of the inverter in %. 100 % corresponds to 

the nominal power of the inverter. 

2814h 

0h 

read (1) 


ID 441727.02 189



04 




E21 

Global 

read (1) 

Motor utilisation: Indicates current utilization of the motor in %. Reference number is the 

nominal motor current entered under B12. 


2815h 0h 

E22 

Global 

read (1) 

E23 

Axis 

read (1) 

E24 

Global 

read (1) 

E25 

Global 

read (1) 

E26.0 

Global 

read (2) 

i2t-device: Level of the thermal device model (i 2 t model). The fault "59:overtemp.device i2t" 

occurs at 105 % of full load. When the 100 % limit is reached, the inverter triggers the event 

"39:overtemp.device i2t" with the level specified in U02. The output current is limited to the 

permissible device nominal current for servo and vector control (B20 = 2 or 64). 

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 05 80 00 hex 

i2t-motor: Level of the thermal motor model (i2t model). 100 % corresponds to full utilization. The 

thermal model is based on the design data entered under group B.. (Motor) (i.e., continuous 

operation - S1 operation). With more than 100 %, the reaction parameterized in U10, U11 is 

triggered for the event "45:overtemp.device i2t." 

If the motor is fitted with a KTY, the I2t model will be tracked using the motor temperature 

measurement. If the nameplate is active in this case, U10 = 2.warning and U11 = 1 s will be set. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 05 C0 00 hex 

i2t-braking resistor: Level of the thermal braking resistor model (i²t model). 100 % corresponds 

to full utilization. The data of the braking resistor are specified with A21 ... A23. With more than 100 

%, the fault "42:tempBrakeRes" occurs. 

Value range in %: 0 ... 80 ... 255 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; (raw value:100·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 05 06 00 00 hex 

Device-temperature: Current device temperature in °C. (Upper temperature limit R05 / Lower 

temperature limit R25) 


Brake: The parameter only exists with the SDS 5000. Element 0 indicates the control status of 

brake 1 (on X5 or on brake module X302). 

0: set; 

1: release; 


2816h 

2817h 

2818h 

2819h 

281Ah 

Array 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

E26.1 

Global 

read (2) 

Brake: The parameter only exists with the SDS 5000. Element 1 indicates the control status of 

brake 2 (on X5 or on brake module X302). 

0: set; 

1: release; 

281Ah 

Array 

1h 


E27 

Global 

Binary outputs: The status of all binary outputs is indicated as binary word. Bit0 = BA1 to Bit9 = 

BA10. 

281Bh 

0h 

read (2) 

NOTE 

Note that an encoder simulation on BA1 and BA2 is not indicated in E27. 


ID 441727.02 190



04 




E28 

Global 

Analog-output2-level: Indication of the level on the analog output (X1.7 and X1.8). ±10 V 

corresponds to ±16384. 

281Ch 0h 

read (1) 

E29 

Axis 

read (2) 


Warning: Perform brake test!: If the brake management is not active (B310=0:inactive) the 

warning remains at 0:inactive. With the activation of the brake management it is monitored whether 

the time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed but the action B300 Brake test has 

not been performed. 

0: Warning inactive; 

1: Brake test necessary, reasons for this message can be: 

- The time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed but the action B300 Brake test has 

not been performed. 

- The time set in B311 Timeout for brake test B300 has elapsed twice but the action B300 Brake 

test has not been performed (Malfunction 72:Brake test is present). 

- The action B300 has been completed with an error. 


281Dh 

0h 

E30 

Global 

Run time: Indication of how long the inverter controller section was supplied with voltage 

(operating hours counter). 

281Eh 

0h 

read (1) 


E31 

Global 

Enable time: Indication of how long the inverter controller section was supplied with voltage and 

the power section enable was active. 

281Fh 

0h 

read (1) 


E32 

Energy counter: Indication of the total supplied energy in Wh. 

2820h 

0h 

Global 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1Wh; PDO ; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 05 08 00 00 hex 

read (1) 

E33 

Global 

Vi-max-memorized value: The DC link voltage is monitored continuously. The greatest 

measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A37→1. 

2821h 

0h 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; PDO ; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 08 40 00 hex 

E34 

Global 

I-max-memorized value: The motor current is monitored continuously. The greatest measured 

value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A37→1. 

2822h 

0h 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1A; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.3; USS-Adr: 05 08 80 00 hex 

E35 

Global 

Tmin-memorized value: The temperature of the inverter is monitored continuously. The 

smallest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A37→1. 

2823h 

0h 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 05 08 C0 00 hex 

E36 

Global 

Tmax-memorized value: The temperature of the inverter is monitored continuously. The 

greatest measured value is stored here non-volatilely. This value can be reset with A37→1. 

2824h 

0h 

read (1) 


ID 441727.02 191



04 




E39 

Global 

read (3) 

Application start time: When the configuration has started successfully on the device, E30 

operating time is copied to E39. 


2827h 0h 

E43 

Global 

read (3) 

Event cause: Diagnostic information concerning the fault which occurred last. The currently 

active event is indicated in E82 event type. 

Event "34:hardware fault" 

1: FPGA; Fault while loading the FPGA block to the control section. 

2: NOV-ST; The non-volatile memory of the control section board is defective. 

3: NOV-LT; The non-volatile memory of the power section board is defective. 

4: brake 1; Activation of brake 1 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V power. 

5: brake 2; Activation of brake 2 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V power. 

11: currentMeas; Deviation in current offset measurement during device startup is too great. 

Event "37:n-feedback" 

1: Paraencoder; parameterization does not match the connected encoder. 

2: ParaChgOffOn; Parameterchange; encoder parameterization cannot be changed during 

operation. Save and then turn device off and on so that the change takes effect. 

4: X4 chan.A/Clk; wire break, possibly track A / clock 

5: X4 chan.B/Dat; wire break, possibly track B / data 

6: X4 chan.0; wire break, track 0 

7: X4EnDatAlarm; The EnDat ® encoder reported an alarm. 

8: X4EnDatCRC; The EnDat ® encoder reported that too many errors were found during the 

redundancy check. The cause can be wirebreak or errors in the cable shield. 

10: resol.carrier; resolver is not or wrong connected, wirebreak is possible 

11: X140-undervol; wrong transmission factor, wire break 

12: X140-overvolt.; wrong transmission factor, wire break 

14: resol.failure; wirebreak 

15: X120-double t; Different values were determined during the double transmission to X120. 

16: X120-Busy; encoder gave no response for too long; For SSI slave: No telegram for the last 5 

ms and drive is enabled. 

17: X120-wirebreak; A wire break was discovered on X120. 

18: X120-Timeout; 

19: X4-double tr.; Different values were determined during the double transmission to X4. 

20: X4-Busy; encoder gave no response for too long 

21: X4-wirebreak; 

22: AX5000; Acknowledgment of the axis switch is not effected. 

23: Ax5000require; comparison of E57 and E70. 

24: X120-speed; B297, G297 or I297 exceeded for encoder on X120. 


26: No Enc. found; either no encoder was found on X4 or the EnDat ® /SSI encoder has a wire 

break. 

27: X4-AX5000 found; a functional AX 5000 option board was found on X4 although incremental 

encoder or EnDat ® encoder was parameterized, or no EnDat ® encoder is connected to the AX 

5000 option board. 

28: X4-EnDat found.; an EnDat ® encoder was found on X4 although another encoder was 

parameterized. 

29: AX5000/IncEnc; either X4 has a faulty AX 5000 option board or the A-track of an incremental 

encoder has a wire break. 

282Bh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 192



04 




30: opt2 incomp.; Version of option 2 is not current. 

31: X140-EnDatAlar; The EnDat ® encoder on X140 reports an alarm. 

32: X140-EnDatCRC; The EnDat ® encoder on X140 reports that too many faults were found during 

the redundancy test. Possible causes may be wire break or a cable shield fault. 

33: IGB-speed; G297 exceeded on the IGB. 

34: Battery low; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the voltage of the battery has 

fallen below the warning limit of the encoder. Referencing of the axis remains intact. However, 

the remaining service life of the backup battery is limited. Replace the AES battery before the 

next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute 

Encoder Support AES. 

35: Battery empty; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the voltage of the battery 

has fallen below the minimum voltage of the encoder. Referencing of the axis has been deleted. 

The backup battery is no longer able to retain the position in the encoder over the time during 

which the inverter in switched off. Referencing the axis. Replace the AES battery before the 

next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the Absolute 

Encoder Support AES. 

Event "40:invalid data" 

0 ... 7: Fault on the non-volatile memory of the control section board. 

1: fault; Low-level write/read error or timeout 

2: blockMiss; Unknown data block. 

3: dataSecurity; Block has no data security 

4: checksum; Data block has checksum error. 

5: r/o; Data block is "read only." 

6: readErr; Startup phase: block read error 

7: blockMiss; Block not found. 

16 ... 31: Non-volatile power module memory 

17: fault; Low-level write/read error or timeout 


19: dataSecurity; Block has no data security 

20: checksum; Data block has checksum error. 

21: r/o; Data block is "read only." 

22: readErr; Startup phase: block read error 


32 ... 47: Non-volatile encoder memory 

32: el.mot-type; No nameplate data exists 

33: el.typeLim; A parameter from the electrical motor nameplate could not be entered (limit value or 

non existent). 

48 bis 59: Non-volatile option 2 memory 

48: optionBoard2; Error in non-volatile memory of option 2 with REA 5000 and REA 5001 

respectively and XEA 5000 and XEA 5001 respectively 

Event "46: low voltage" 

1: Low Voltage; the value in E03 DC-link-voltage has dropped below the value parameterized in 

A35 low voltage limit. 

2: Network phase; phase monitoring has found that a switched-on power unit is missing a phase. 

3: Drop in networ; when phase monitoring finds that the network voltage is missing, the charging 

relay is immediately switched off. Normal operation is maintained. If the power unit is still 

switched on after network voltage returns, a fault is triggered after 0.5 s. 

ID 441727.02 193



04 




Event "52:communication" 

1: CAN LifeGuard; The device recognized the "life-guarding-event" (master no longer sends RTR). 

2: CAN Sync Error; the sync message was not received within the time set in parameter A201 

cycle period timeout. 

3: CAN Bus Off; went off when bus went off. The driver started it again. 

4: PZD-Timeout; failure of the cyclic data connection (PROFIBUS). 

5: USS; (under preparation) failure of the cyclic data connection (USS). 

6: EtherCAT PDO-Ti; The inverter failed to receive process data within the time set in A258. 

7: EtherCAT-DcSYNC0; There is a malfunction on the synchronization signal "SYNC 0". This 

malfunction can only occur with EtherCAT synchronization activated using "Distributed Clock 

(DC)". 

8: IGB µC failure; The controller for IGB communication has failed. 

9: IGB lost frame; IGB-Motionbus fault. The station discovered the loss of at least 2 consecutive 

data frames (double error). This cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:motionbus and 

the motor is energized. 

10: IGB P.lostFra; IGB-Motionbus fault. Another station discovered a double error and reported this 

via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with this cause. The cause can only 

occur when the IGB state = 3:motionbus and the motor is energized. 

11: IGB sync erro; The synchronization within the inverter has malfunctioned because the 

configuration was stopped by POSITool. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 

3:motionbus and the motor was energized. 

12: IGB configTim; A block was not executed at the beginning of the global area in real-time. The 

runtime sequence of blocks may have been set incorrectly. This fault can only occur when the 

IGB state equaled 3:motionbus and the motor was energized. 

13: IGBPartnerSyn; Another station in the IGB network has a synchronization fault (see cause 11). 

This station reported its fault via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction with cause 

13. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was 

energized. 

Event "55:Option board" 

1: CAN5000failure; CAN 5000 was recognized , installed and failed. 

2: DP5000failure; DP 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

3: REA5000failure; REA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

4: SEA5000failure; SEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

5: XEA5000failure; XEA 5000 or XEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 

6: EncSim-init; could not be initialized on XEA. The motor may have turned during initialization. 

7: WrongOption; Incorrect or missing option board (comparison of E54/E58 with E68/E69) 

8: LEA5000failure; LEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

9: ECS5000failure; ECS 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

10: supply; Failure of the 24 V supply for XEA 5001 or LEA 5000. 

11: SEA5001failure; SEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 

12: REA5001failure; REA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 

13: PN5000 fail 1; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic hardware tests have 

detected an error. 

14: PN5000 fail 2; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic software tests have 

detected an error. 

15: PN5000 fail 3; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. The Watchdog function of the PN- 

5000 monitoring system has detected an error. 

17: Option2 too old; on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version (XEA 5001: from HW 10, 

REA 5000: from HW 19) 

ID 441727.02 194



04 




Event "57:Runtime usage" 

A cyclic task cannot be completely processed within its cycle time. Cause is the number of the 

affected task. 

Event "69:Motor connection" 

1: motorNotDiscon; The contactor is not released while the axis is being changed. The cause of 

this can only be determined when at least two phase contacts are stuck and the DC link is 

charged (see E03). With asynchronous motors, magnetization could not be established. 

2: no motor; No motor connected at all or the line to the motor is disconnected. 

Event "70:Parameter consistency" 

1: encoder type; control mode B20 is set to "servo" but no appropriate encoder is selected (B26, 

H.. parameter). 

2: X120 direction; X120 is used as source in one parameter but is parameterized in H120 as drain 

(or vice versa). 

3: B12B20; Control mode B20 is not set to servo but the nominal motor current (B12) exceeds 

the 4-kHz nominal current (R24) of the device by more than 1.5 times. 

4: B10H31; Resolver/motorpoleno.; the set motor pole number (B10) and the resolver pole 

number (H31) do not match. 

5: Neg. slip. With use of control modes V/f, SLVE or Vector Control (B20): Control mode to "ASM": 

A negative slip results from the values for nominal motor speed (B13), nominal motor frequency 

(B15) and motor pole number (B10). 

6: torque-lim; When the values entered in C03 or C05 are used, the maximum current of the 

inverter would be exceeded. Enter lower torque limits. 

7: B26:SSI-Slave; SSI slave may not be used as motor encoder (synchronization problems) 

8: C01>B83; C01 may not be greater than B83. 

9: E102/E103 miss; An attempt was made to obtain a master position via the IGB but parameters 

E102 and E103 which are required for this do not exist. 

10: G104G27; A master position is sent via the IGB-Motionbus (i.e., G104 is not set to 

0:inactive), but G27 does not have the settings 0:inactive and 6:IGB which are valid for this 

case. 

Event "71:Firmware" 

1: FW defective; The firmware states of the communication processor and the drive processor are 

not consistent. The firmware must be downloaded again. 

2: activate FW; New firmware was loaded to the inverter but not yet activated. Power supply must 

be turned off/on. 

3: CRC-error; The cyclic check discovered a checksum error. Power supply must be turned off/on. 

If the error occurs again on renewed OFF/ON, the device hardware is faulty and must be 

replaced. 

Event "72:Brake test" 

1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired without action B300 

brake test having been executed. 

2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action, the stopping torque entered in 

B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test run included in the brake test was 

concluded with errors. 

ID 441727.02 195



04 




Event "73:Ax2braketest" 


brake test having been executed with active axis 2. 

2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action with active axis 2, the stopping 

torque entered in B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test run included in the 

brake test was concluded with errors. 













Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 0A C0 00 hex 

E44 

Global 

Event cause: Diagnostic information for the fault which occurred last. The cause is indicated in 

plain text. The currently active event in indicated in E82 event type. 

282Ch 

0h 

read (0) 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0B 00 00 hex 

E48 

Global 

read (0) 

Device control state: State of the device state machine. The device state machine enables or 

disables the drive function and the power module (application on the active axis). 

0: Self-test; The inverter is executing a self test and calibration procedure and cannot be enabled 

yet. The drive function is disabled. The device state automatically changes after a short time to 

1:switch on inhibit. 

1: Switch-on disable; This device state prevents an automatic restart during device startup and 

with the fault acknowledgment. The drive function is disabled. 

The device state can change to 2:ready for switch-on under the following conditions: 

• Enable on low level or A34 autostart active during first startup AND 

• DC link charged AND 

• Axis activated 

2830h 

0h 

Additional conditions for the SDS 5000: 

- No IGB Motionbus is configured or 

- An IGB Motionbus is configured and the IGB is either located in the state 3:IGB Motionbus or 

A124 IGB exceptional motion is activated. 

Information 

Remember that the change in device status from 1:switch on inhibit to 2:ready for switch-on 

depends on parameter A34. 

2: Ready for switch-on; The DC link is charged; E67 starting lockout is inactive; any possible axis 

switch is finished. The drive function is disabled. 

If the enable becomes active now, the device state changes to 3:switched on. 

3: Switched on; The DC link is charged; E67 starting lockout is inactive; the power module is being 

prepared for operation. The drive function is disabled. 

ID 441727.02 196



04 




The device state changes to 4:enabled after the longer of the two times 4 msec or A150 cycle time. 

4: Enabled; The drive function is enabled. Reference values are processed. 

5: Fault; A fault has occurred. The fault memory was written. The drive function is disabled. The 

device state can changed to 1:switch on inhibit when the fault is acknowledged. 

Information 

Remember that the change in device state from 1:switch on inhibit to 2:ready for switch-on depends 

on parameter A34. 

6: Fault reaction; A fault has occurred. The fault memory is being written. When A29 fault-quick 

stop occurs, the drive function remains enabled for the time of the quick stop. The device state 

changes to 5:fault when: 

- The fault memory is written AND either 

- The power module must be switched off (e.g., for short circuit or ground fault) 

- A67 Start up inhibit becomes = 1:active or 

- A29 Fault quick stop is = 0:inactive or 

- The quick stop ends (in standstill after maximum A39 t-max Q-Stop or with enable = inactive) 

or 

- When E06 DC-link-voltage becomes less than 130 V. 

7: Quick stop; A quick stop was triggered; the inverter moves with the quick stop ramp, speedcontrolled, 

to a standstill. The drive function remains enabled for the time of the quick stop. After 

the quick stop is concluded, the device state changes (depending on the device control in the 

global area, A39 t-max. Q-stop, A44 enable quick-stop, A45 quick stop end). 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 0C 00 00 hex 

E50 

Device: Indication of the device type (e.g., MDS 5015). 

2832h 

0h 

Global 


read (0) 

E51.0 

Global 

read (0) 

Firmware version: Software version of the inverter (e.g., V5.0). With the SDS 5000, the version 

of the active firmware is indicated in element 0 and the version of the firmware in the firmware 

download memory is indicated in element 1. 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0C C0 00 hex 

2833h 

Array 

0h 

E51.1 

Global 

read (0) 

Firmware version: Software version of the inverter (e.g., V5.0). With the SDS 5000, the version 

of the active firmware is indicated in element 0 and the version of the firmware in the firmware 

download memory is indicated in element 1. 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0C C0 01 hex 

2833h 

Array 

1h 

E52 

Global 

read (1) 

Serial number: Number of the device from a manufactured series. Corresponds to the number 

on the nameplate. 


2834h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 197



04 




E53 Configuration identification global: Indicates the abbreviation for the configuration of the 2835h 0h 

Global 

global area (independent of axis). If the configuration was changed, a leading asterisk (*) appears. 

3:Klemmen (or IGB motion bus for SDS 5000) 

r=1, w=4 4:USS 

5:CANopen® 

7:PROFIBUS 

19:DSP402 device controller CANopen® 

20:DSP402 device controller PROFIBUS 

23:EtherCAT® 

24:DSP402 device controller EtherCAT® 

26:PROFINET 

27:DSP 402 PROFINET 

E54 

Global 

read (1) 

E55 

Axis 

r=1, w=4 

E56.0 

Global 

r=1, w=2 

Default setting: 5:CAN IGB 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0D 40 00 hex 

Option board 1: Indication of the upper option board (e.g., CAN 5000) which was detected 

during initialization. 


Configuration identification axis: Indicates the abbreviation for the configuration of the axis. 

If the configuration was changed, a leading asterisk (*) appears. 

0: Fast reference value 

1: Command positioning endless 

2: Command positioning limited 

8: Electronic gear limited 

9: Motion block positioning limited 

10: Motion block positioning endless 

11: Electronic gear endless 

12: Electronic gear limited PLCopen® 

13: Electronic gear endless PLCopen® 

15: Interpolated positioning 

16: Technology controller 

18: Comfort reference value 

21: Electronic cam endless 

22: Electronic cam limited 

25: Fast reference value with brake 

Default setting: 0:FastRefValue 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0D C0 00 hex 

Parameter identification: Indicates whether parameters of the axis 1 were changed via the 

operator panel (display and keys). When "0:axis 1" is selected in A11 axis edit and at least one 

parameter was changed via the operator panel, the value of E56.0 Parameter identification is set to 

255. When"1:axis 2" is selected in A11, the value of E56.1 is set to 255 if changes were made. The 

same also applies to axis 3 and 4. This can be used as an indication of unauthorized manipulation 

of parameters. 

1: Default setting of POSITool. 

2..254: Value was purposely set by the user in POSITool or fieldbus and has not been changed yet. 

255: At least one value was changed via the operator panel! 

Exceptions: When A11 is set on the operator panel or A00 save values is triggered, this has no 

effect on E56. 

Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255 


2836h 

2837h 

2838h 

Array 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 198



04 




E56.1 Parameter identification: Indicates whether parameters of the axis 2 were changed via the 2838h 1h 

Global 



r=1, w=2 255. When"1:axis 2" is selected in A11, the value of E56.1 is set to 255 if changes were made. The 

Array 








Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255 


E56.2 

Global 

r=1, w=2 

E56.3 

Global 

r=1, w=2 

E57 

Global 

read (1) 

E58 

Global 

read (1) 












Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255 













Value range: 0 ... 1 ... 255 


POSISwitch: Indication of a POSISwitch ® which was detected during initialization. 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0E 40 00 hex 

Optional board 2: Indication of the lower option board (e.g., SEA 5000) which was detected 

during initialization. 


2838h 

Array 

2838h 

Array 

2839h 

283Ah 

2h 

3h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 199



04 




E59 

Global 

Configuration identification: Indicates the abbreviation for the complete configuration (global 

area and all four axes). If the configuration was changed, an asterisk (*) is shown. 

283Bh 0h 

Default setting: user 

r=1, w=4 Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0E C0 00 hex 

E60 

Global 

read (3) 

E61 

Global 

read (3) 

E62 

Global 

read (1) 

E66 

Global 

read (1) 

E67 

Global 

read (1) 

E68 

Global 

read (3) 

E69 

Global 

read (3) 

E70 

Global 

read (3) 

Safe firmware version: Only with SDS 5000. Version of the boot firmware of the inverter (e.g., 

V 4.1). 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 0F 00 00 hex 

ParaModul: Size of the ParaModul memory in kilobytes. This parameter makes it possible to 

differentiate between the different sizes of ParaModul memory (128 kBytes, 256 kBytes or 1024 

kBytes). 

1024 kBytes are only supported from firmware V 5.5. 

A size of 0 kBytes means that a ParaModul has not been found or the ParaModul size is not 

supported. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1kBytes; Type: U32; (raw value:10 Bit=1·kBytes); USS-Adr: 05 0F 40 00 hex 

Act. pos. T-max: Currently effective positive torque limit in relation to B18. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 0F 80 00 hex 

Act. neg. T-max: Currently effective positive torque limit in relation to B18. 


Starting lockout: Indication of the status of the ASP 5001 option. 

0: inactive; The starting lockout (startup disable) is inactive. The power section can be enabled. 

1: active; The starting lockout (startup disable) is active. The power section is reliably disabled. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 10 C0 00 hex 

Required optional board 1: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the 

configuration is transferred via Paramodul to another device, a comparison of E68 and E54 ensures 

that all hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "55:option board" is triggered with E43 

event cause = 7:wrong or missing option board. The fault can then not be acknowledged. 

Default setting: CAN 5000 


Required optional board 2: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the 

configuration is transferred via Paramodul to another device, a comparison of E69 and E58 ensures 

that all hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "55:option board" is triggered with E43 

event cause = 7:wrong or missing option board. The fault can then not be acknowledged. 

Default setting: SEA 5001 


Required Ax5000: Is entered by the POSITool configuration assistant. When the configuration 

via Paramodul is transferred to another device, a comparison of E70 with E57 ensures that all 

hardware resources are present. If not, the fault "37:n-feedback" (from V5.2: 37:encoder) with E43 

event cause = 23:Ax5000-n-reference is triggered. The fault can then not be acknowledged. 

Default setting: AX 5000 


283Ch 

283Dh 

283Eh 

2842h 

2843h 

2844h 

2845h 

2846h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 200



04 




AE1 scale: AE1 signal by offset and gain. E71 = (E10 + F11) * F12. 

2847h 0h 

E71 

Global 

read (1) 

E72 

Global 

read (1) 

E73 

Global 

read (1) 

E74 

Global 

read (1) 

E75 

Global 

read (2) 


AE2 scale: AE2 signal by filter, offset and gain. E72 = (E11 + F21) * F22. 


AE3 scale: AE2 signal by filter, offset and gain as well as PID controller and offset 2. 

E73 = (E74 + F31) * F32 


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot. 

AE3-Level: Level of signal queued on the analog input 3 (X102.1 - X102.2) (without consideration 

of F31, F32). To allow for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller 

specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F31 with the opposite sign. 



X1.Enable-inverted: The level of the X1.Enable binary input is displayed inverted. 

This signal can, for example, be used for inverted acknowledgement of X1.Enable via any binary 

output if this is required for dual-channel activation together with the ASP 5000. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: B; USS-Adr: 05 12 C0 00 hex 

2848h 

2849h 

284Ah 

284Bh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

E80 

Axis 

read (0) 

Operating condition: Indication of the current operating status as per the operating indication. 

Useful for fieldbus queries or serial remote control. 

10: PLCO_init; Initialize position control (applications motion block positioning or electronic cam). 

11: PLCO_Passive; Position control is in the state 1:passive (applications motion block positioning 

or electronic cam). 

12: standstill; Position control is in the state 2:standstill (applications motion block positioning or 

electronic cam). 

13: discr.motion; Position control is in the state 3:discrete motion (applications motion block 

positioning or electronic cam). 

14: cont.motion; Position control is in the state 4:continuous motion (applications motion block 


15: sync.motion; Position control is in the state 5:synchronous motion (applications motion block 


16: stopping; Position control is in the state 6:stopping (applications motion block positioning or 


17: errorStop; Position control is in the state 7:errorstop (applications motion block positioning or 


18: homing; Position control is in the state 8:homing (applications motion block positioning or 


19: limit switch; One of the limit switches has tripped. Remember that not every application has the 

limit switch function (applications motion block positioning or electronic cam). 

2850h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 201



04 




20: denied; Position control has determined one of the following events (applications motion block 

positioning or electronic cam): 

- The drive is not referenced but the motion job requires the reference. 

- A motion job was triggered whose target position is located outside the software limit switch. 

- A motion job was triggered which moved in a direction of rotation which is inhibited. 

The message combines faults 1 to 4 in /90 ErrorCode. 

21: limited; Position control has determined that one of the following limits was reached 

(applications motion block positioning or electronic cam): 

- Torque limit 

- Following error 

- M-limitation by i 2 t 

22: aborted; Position control has determined one of the following events (applications motion block 

positioning or electronic cam): 

- An MC_Stop was triggered. 

- The enable was switched off. 

- A quick stop was triggered. 

23: waiting; The drive is located in a chain of motion blocks and is waiting for the advance signal 

(application motion block positioning). 

24: delay; The drive is located in a chain of motion blocks with pause and the pause is still in effect 

(application motion block positioning). 

30: fault; The inverter ist in the state fault. 

31: self test; The inverter ist in the state self test. 

32: switch-on disable; The inverter ist in the state switch-on diable (see the Operating Manuals of 

the inverters). 

33: param.lock; reserved 

34: quick stop; The inverter performs a quick stop. 

35: switched on; The inverter is in the state switcjed on (see the Operating Manuals of the 

inverters). 

36: jog active; Tipping operation is active in the comfort reference value application (D437 = 

1:active). 

37: stop active; During the comfort reference value application, a halt command is queued and the 

speed has reached the range +C40 to -C40 once (D438 = 1:active). 

38: stop; During the comfort reference value application, a halt command is queued (D302 = 

1:active) and the drive delays with the ramp D84. 

39: not allowed direction; During the comfort reference value application, a reference value is 

specified for a certain direction of rotation which is inhibited (D184 = 1:active, see also D308 and 

D309). 

40: capturing; During the comfort reference value application, the inverter is in scan active mode 

(D433 = 1:active). 

41: heavy duty starting; During the comfort reference value application, the inverter is in startup 

under load mode (D434 = 1:active). 

42: accelerating; During the comfort reference value application, the amount of motor speed 

increases (D443 = 1:active). 

43: decelerating; During the comfort reference value application, the amount of motor speed 

decreases (D444 = 1:aktiv). 

44: reference > max reference; During the comfort reference value application, the speed limit is 

reached which limit is indicated in D336 (torque control) or D338 (speed control) (D185 = 

1:active). 

45: reference < min reference; During the comfort reference value application, the speed limit is 

reached which limit is indicated in D337 (torque control) or D339 (speed control) (D186 = 

1:active). 

46:zero torque=0; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the 

current torque is in the range of -5 % M N to +5 % M N . 

47: positive torque; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the 

current torque (E90) is greater than 5 % as related to the user direction of rotation (D57) (D440 

= 1:active). 

ID 441727.02 202



04 




48: negative torque; During torque control mode in the comfort reference value application, the 

current torque (E90) is lower than -5 % as related to the user direction of rotation (D57) (D441 = 

1:active). 

49: standstill; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the speed has 

reached the range of +C40 to -C40 (D180 = 1:active). 

50: forward direction; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the 

speed (E91) is greater than C40 as related to the user direction (D57) (D442 = 1:active). 

51: backward direction; During speed control mode in the comfort reference value application, the 

speed (E91) is lower than -C40 as related to the user direction (D57). 

52: limit switch wrong; During the comfort reference value application, the limit switches are mixed 

up (i.e., the -limit switch triggered for a positive reference value (D304 = 1:active) or vice versa). 

E81 

Global 

read (1) 

E82 

Global 

read (0) 


Event level: Indicates whether a current event is queued. The corresponding event type is 

indicated in E82. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control. 

0: inactive. The event system is inactive. The inverter is running in normal operating mode. 

1: Message. A message is waiting. Operation continues. 

2: Warning. A warning is waiting. Operation can be continued until expiration of the warning time 

for this event (indicated in E83 warning time). After that a fault is triggered. 

3: Fault. A fault has occurred. The drive function is blocked. 


Event type: Indication of the currently queued event/fault. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial 

remote control. The cause is stored in E43 / E44. 

30: inactive; 

31: Short/ground; The hardware overcurrent switch off is active because the motor demands too 

much current from the inverter (interwinding fault, overload). 

32: Short/ground internal; During the enabling of the inverter, a short circuit was determined. An 

internal device error has probably occurred. 

33: Overcurrent; The total motor current exceeds the permissible maximum. Could be acceleration 

times are too short or torque limits in C03 and C05 were set incorrectly. 

34: Hardware fault; A hardware error has occurred (e.g., in the memory of the control section). See 

E43. 

35: Watchdog; The watchdog of the microprocessor has triggered. The microprocessor is being 

used to full capacity or its function may be faulty. 

36: High voltage; The voltage in the DC link exceeds the permissible maximum. This can be due to 

excessive network voltage, the feedback of the drive during braking mode, too low a braking 

resistor or due to a brake ramp which is too steep. 

37: Encoder; An error in the parameterized encoder was determined (for details, see E43). 

38: Overtemp.device sensor; The temperature measured by the device sensor exceeds the 

permissible maximum value. The cause may be that ambient and switching cabinet 

temperatures are too high. 

39: Overtemp.device i2t; The i2t-model for the inverter exceeds 100 % of the thermal capacity. 

Causes may be an inverter overload due to a motor blockage or a switching frequency which is 

too high. 

40: Invalid data; While the non-volatile memory was being initialized, a data error was found (for 

details, see E43). 

41: Temp.MotorTMP; The motor temperature sensor reports excessive temperature. The motor may 

be overloaded or the temperature sensor is not connected. 

42: TempBrakeRes.; The i2t model for the braking resistor exceeds 100 % of the capacity. The 

braking resistor may not be designed to handle the application. 

43: inactive; 

44: External fault 1; Triggering is programmed application-specifically. 

45: Overtemp.motor i2t; The i2t model of the motor reaches 100 % of the load. The motor may be 

overloaded. 

2851h 

2852h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 203



04 




46: Low voltage; The DC link voltage is below the limit value set in A35. The cause can be drops in 

the network voltage, the failure of a phase with three-phase connection or the acceleration times 

are too short. 

47: Torque limit; The torque permitted for static operation is exceeded in the controller types servo 

controller, vector controller or sensorless vector controller. The limits may have been set 

incorrectly in C03 and C05. 

48: inactive; 

49: inactive; 

50: inactive; 

51: inactive; 

52: Communication; A fault in communication was determined (for details, see E43). 

53: inactive; 

54: inactive; 

55: Option board; A fault in the operation of an option board was determined (for details, see E43). 

56: Overspeed; The measured speed was greater than C01 x 1.1 + 100 Rpm. The encoder may be 

defective. 

57: Second activation; The cycle time of a real-time task was exceeded (for details, see E43). 

58: Grounded; The power module has determined an error (starting with module 3). 

59: Overtemp.device i2t; The i2t model of the inverter exceeds 105 % of the capacity. The cause 

may be an overload of the inverter due to a motor blockage or a switching frequency which is 

too high. 

60: ; 

61: ; 

62: ; 

63: ; 

64: ; 

65: ; 

66: ; 

67: ; 

68: External fault 2; Triggering is programmed application-specifically. 

69: Motor connection; A connection error of the motor was determined (for details, see E43). 

70: Parameter consistency; The parameterization has inconsistencies (for details, see E43). 

71: firmware; 

72: Brake test timeout; Brake test timeout. Brake management reports that a brake test is necessary 

(see E43). 

73: Axis 2 brake test timeout; Brake management reports that a brake test of axis 2 is necessary 

(see E43). 


(see E43). 


(see E43). 


E83 

Global 

Warning time: While warnings are running, the time remaining until the fault is triggered is 

indicated. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control. 

2853h 

0h 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1s; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 14 C0 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 204



04 




E84 

Global 

Active axis: Indication of the current axis. Useful for fieldbus polling or serial remote control. 

0: Axis 1; 

2854h 0h 

1: Axis 2; 

read (1) 

2: Axis 3; 

3: Axis 4; 

4: All axes inactive. Axis 1 was active last. 





E90 

M-Motor: Indication of the current motor torque in Nm. In contrast to E02, not smoothed. 

285Ah 

0h 

Global 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01Nm; PDO ; Type: I16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.16; USS-Adr: 05 16 80 00 hex 

read (3) 

E91 

Global 

read (3) 

n-motor: Indication of the current motor speed in Rpm. In contrast to E08, not smoothed. When 

the drive is operated without feedback, this speed is mathematically determined via the motor 

model (in this case, the actual motor speed may differ from the calculated speed). 


285Bh 

0h 

E92 

I-d: Flux current in %. 

285Ch 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E93 

I-q: Torque-generating current in %. 

285Dh 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E94 

I-a: Measured a-current components in ab-system. 

285Eh 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E95 

I-b: Measured b-current components in ab-system. 

285Fh 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E96 

I-u: Measured u-current components in uvw-system. 

2860h 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E97 

I-v: Measured v-current component in uvw-sysstem. 

2861h 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

ID 441727.02 205



04 




Ud: Voltage in d-direction in V (chained peak voltage). 

2862h 0h 

E98 

Global 

read (3) 

E99 

Global 

read (3) 

E100 

Global 

read (1) 

E101 

Global 

read (1) 

E102 

Global 

r=2, w=3 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 18 80 00 hex 

Uq: Voltage in q-direction in V (chained peak voltage). 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 05 18 C0 00 hex 

n-motor: Indication of the current motor speed as % in space-saving 16-bit format. The 

specification is related to C01 n-max. 


I-Motor: Indicates the current motor current in % of the nominal device current at 4 kHz switching 

frequency. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 19 40 00 hex 

Lead position consumer: Receiving parameter for a lead position via IGB. E102 must be 

allocated to parameter E163 of the lead position in IGB mapping. 

The parameter value is indicated scaled in revolutions. The internal scaling raw value is 1 MSB = 

2048 revolutions. 

MSB = most significant Bit 

2863h 

2864h 

2865h 

2866h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

Information 



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1E-6revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:20 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 19 80 00 hex 

E103 

Global 

r=2, w=3 

Lead position consumer timestamp: Receiving parameter for a time stamp for the lead 

position (E102) via IGB. E103 must be allocated to parameter E164 of the lead position in IGB 

mapping. 

The parameter value is indicated scaled in µs. The internal scaling raw value is 1 LSB = 7.63 ns. 

2867h 

0h 

LSB = least significant Bit 

Information 



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; PDO ; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 32767999 µs); USS-Adr: 05 19 C0 00 hex 

E120 

Equipment: The text entered in the field "equipment" during step 1/6 of the device configuration. 

2878h 

0h 

Global 


r=1, w=5 

E121 

User: The text entered in the field "user" during step 1/6 of the device configuration. 

2879h 

0h 

Global 


read (1) 

ID 441727.02 206



04 




E122.0 Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: User/login name on the 287Ah 0h 

Global 

read (3) 

PC with which the download was performed. 


Array 

E122.1 

Global 

read (3) 

E122.2 

Global 

read (3) 

E122.3 

Global 

read (3) 

E123.0 

Global 

read (3) 

E123.1 

Global 

read (3) 

E123.2 

Global 

read (3) 

E123.3 

Global 

read (3) 

E149 

Global 

read (1) 

E151 

Global 

read (2) 

Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Computer name of the PC 

with which the download was performed. 


Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Date and time of the 

firmware download. 


Download information: Contains information on the active firmware: Number of previously 

performed downloads on the connected inverter. 


Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. 

User/registration name on the PC on which the download was performed. 

Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 05 1E C0 00 hex 

Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Computer 

name of the PC with which the download was performed. 


Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Date and 

time of the firmware download. 


Download information 2: Contains information on the firmware download memory. Number of 

downloads to the connected inverter that have been performed up to now. 


Hardware Version: Device family (FDS/MDS/SDS), hardware version of the power section 

(layout version), power section manufacturing date (calendar week and year). 


Active switching frequency: The current switching frequency used by the inverter. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1kHz; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 25 C0 00 hex 

287Ah 

Array 

287Ah 

Array 

287Ah 

Array 

287Bh 

Array 

287Bh 

Array 

287Bh 

Array 

287Bh 

Array 

2895h 

2897h 

1h 

2h 

3h 

0h 

1h 

2h 

3h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 207



04 




E152 SSI simulation raw value: Indicates the position which is output via the SSI simulation. 

2898h 0h 

Global 

With a 25-bit SSI simulation, the upper 25 bits (31..7) of E152 correspond to the position output via 

SSI. 

read (3) With a 13-bit SSI simulation, bits 19..7 correspond to the position output via SSI. 

Bits 6..0 are hidden when SSI is used. 


Only visible when E58 = XEA 5000 (and XEA 5001 respectively) and H120 is greater than 

80:Incremental-Encoder-Simulation. 

E153 

Global 

Accumulated raw-motor-encoder: Supplies an accumulated raw value of the motor encoder 

parameterized in B26. The value contains the value of B35 as the adding offset. 

2899h 

0h 

read (3) 

Since these values are raw values, scaling depends on the motor encoder being used. 

• EnDat ® , SSI: MSB = 2048U 

• Resolver: 65536LSBs = 1U (i.e., MSB = 32768U) 

• Incremental encoder: 1LSB = 1Count (4-fold evaluation of the number of markers) 





E154 

Global 

Raw motor-encoder: Supplies the raw value of the motor encoder parameterized in B26. The 

value contains the value of B35 as the adding offset. 

289Ah 

0h 

read (3) 

Since these values are raw values, scaling depends on the motor encoder being used. 

• EnDat ® , SSI: MSB = 2048 U 

• Resolver: 65536LSBs = 1U (i.e., MSB = 32768U) 

• Incremental encoder: 1LSB = 1Count (4-fold evaluation of the number of markers), Counter 

resolution: 16 bits 





E155 

Global 

read (3) 

Raw position-encoder: Raw value of the encoder parameterized in I02. The format varies 

depending on which encoder is used. For EnDat ® and SSI encoders, the data word is specified leftjustified 

by the encoder. 

Example: 

- EnDat ® Multiturn, SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions 

- EnDat ® Singleturn, resolver: MSB = 0.5 encoder revolutions 

- Incremental encoder: Only the upper 16 bits are used. They contain the counted increments after 

4-fold evaluation. 

289Bh 

0h 



ID 441727.02 208



04 




E156 Raw master-encoder: Raw value of the encoder parameterized in G27. The format varies with 289Ch 0h 

Global 

the encoder being used. 

Example: 

read (3) - EnDat ® Multiturn, SSI: MSB = 2048 encoder revolutions 

- EnDat ® Singleturn, resolver: MSB = 0.5 encoder revolutions 

- Incremental encoder: Only the upper 16 bits are used. They contain the counted increments after 

4-fold evaluation. 



E161 

n-rmpg: The speed reference value on the output of the ramp generator. 

28A1h 

0h 

Global 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1rpm; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:14 Bit=1·rpm); USS-Adr: 05 28 40 00 hex 

read (3) 

E163 

Global 

Lead-Position Producer: The parameter provides a lead axis position for the further 

distribution via IGB. The source of this lead axis position can be selected in G104. 

28A3h 

0h 

read (2) 

The parameter value is indicated scaled in revolutions. The internal scaling raw value is 1 MSB = 

2048 revolutions. 

(MSB = Most Significant Bit) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1E-6revolutions; PDO ; Type: I32; (raw value:20 Bit=1·revolutions); USS-Adr: 05 28 C0 00 hex 

E164 

Global 

Lead-Position Prod. Timestamp: The parameter provides a timestamp for the lead axis 

position in E163 for the further distribution via IGB. 

28A4h 

0h 

read (2) 

The parameter value is indicated scaled in µs. The internal scaling raw value is 1 LSB = 7.63 ns. 

(LSB = Least Significant Bit) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; PDO ; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 32767999 µs); USS-Adr: 05 29 00 00 hex 

E165 

Id-ref: Reference value for the flux current in %. 

28A5h 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E166 

Iq-ref: Reference value for the torque generating current in %. 

28A6h 

0h 

Global 


read (3) 

E167 

Power module state: Specifies whether the power end stage is enabled. 

28A7h 

0h 

Global 

read (3) 

192: power module off; 

248: activate power module; 

255: power module on; 


ID 441727.02 209



04 




E170 

Global 

T-reference: Only for control types with torque specification. Reference torque currently required 

by the speed controller. 

28AAh 0h 

read (2) 

E174 

Global 

read (3) 

E175 

Global 

read (3) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; PDO ; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 2A 80 00 hex 

CRC-counter: Counts non-volatilely the CRC and Busy errors which occurred on EnDat ® 

encoders. The occurrence of CRC errors indicates EMC problems. This value can be reset with 

A37→1. 


SSI-errors: Counts the erroneous protocols which occur with SSI encoders. Erroneous protocols 

are recognized when the maximum incremental value contained in H900 exceeds two consecutive 

protocols. The erroneous value is rejected. When the second error occurs in succession, the 

system malfunctions (maximum following error, encoder). 

NOTE 

The parameter H900 can only be read/changed by level-4 users. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; USS-Adr: 05 2B C0 00 hex 

28AEh 

28AFh 

0h 

0h 

E176.0 

Counter grind actions: Counts all B301 grind-brake 1 actions, regardless of result B301.2. 

28B0h 

0h 

Axis 

read (2) 


Array 

E176.1 

Counter grind actions: Counts all B301 grind-brake 2 actions, regardless of result B302.2. 

28B0h 

1h 

Axis 

read (2) 


Array 

E177 

Axis 

Time passed since last brake test: Indicates the time in hours which has passed since the 

last B300 brake test action. 

28B1h 

0h 

read (2) 

If brake management is not active (B310 = 0:inactive), the time remains zero. The time begins to 

run when brake management is activated. 

The time remaining until event 72 is indicated as the "brake test" message is calculated as follows: 

(B311 timeout brake test B300) - (E177 time since last brake test). 

The next brake test should be performed within this time. 

The time remaining until event 72 is indicated as the "brake test" fault is calculated as follows: 

2 * B311 - E177 

The inverter is blocked due to the fault. The fault must be acknowledged before the functions B300 

brake test and B301/B302 brake 1/2 grind can be performed. 

Information 

This parameter applies similarly to events 73, 74 and 75 in axes 2, 3 and 4. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1hours; Type: U32; (raw value:4294967295 = 298261 hours); USS-Adr: 05 2C 40 00 hex 

E178 

Global 

Counter ASP switching cycles: The parameter counts each request and deselection of the 

ASP 5001 when the control part is active. 

28B2h 

0h 

read (2) 


ID 441727.02 210



04 




E180 

Global 

Status positive T-limit: The positive torque limit is in effect. In the "comfort reference value" 

application, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 3 in fieldbus mode. 

28B4h 0h 

0: inactive; 

read (3) 

1: active; 

E181 

Global 

read (3) 

E182 

Global 

read (3) 

E183 

Global 

read (3) 

E191 

Global 

r=2, w=4 

E200 

Global 

read (2) 


Status negative T-limit: The negative torque limit is in effect. In the "comfort reference value" 

application, the signal can be read in D200 Bit 4 in fieldbus mode. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Status positive n-limit: With operation with speed limiter or with torque control (C61 = 1), the 

positive maximum speed was reached. With operation without speed limiter or with speed control 

(C61 = 0), a too large positive reference value speed was limited to +C01. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Status negative n-limit: With operation with speed limiter or torque control (C61 = 1), the 

negative maximum speed was reached. With operation without speed limiter or with speed control 

(C61 = 0), an excessively negative reference value speed was limited to -C01. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; PDO ; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 05 2D C0 00 hex 

Runtime usage: Indication of the relative utilization of the real-time task by the graphic 

configuration. The maximum value is calculated for each cycle of the configuration. When utilization 

is too high (> approx. 75 %), the cycle time in A150 should be set to a higher value. With changes 

of A150, E191 starts at 0 %. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1%; Type: U16; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.9; USS-Adr: 05 2F C0 00 hex 

Device status byte: This byte contains status signals of the device controller. 

Bit 0: Enabled. The drive is ready. No faults, the device status corresponds to E84 = 4:oper. 

enabled. 

Bit 1: Error. Device status is "fault reaction active" or "fault." 

Bit 2: Quick stop (also quick stop in "fault reaction active"). 

Bit 3,4: With multiple-axis operation, the active axis is shown here. 

Bit 4 Bit 3 Axis 

0 0 Axis 1 

0 1 Axis 2 

1 0 Axis 3 

1 1 Axis 4 

Bit-5: Axis in E84 is active. 

Bit-6: Local: Local operation is activated. 

Bit-7: Bit 7 in A180 (device control byte) is copied once every device controller cycle to bit 7 in 

E200 (device status byte). When bit 7 in A180 is toggled, the higher-level PLC is informed of 

a concluded communication cycle (send, evaluate, return data). For PROFIBUS for 

example, this permits cycle-time-optimized communication. The handshake bit 7 in A180 / 

E200 supplies no information as to whether the application has reacted to the process data. 

28B5h 

28B6h 

28B7h 

28BFh 

28C8h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 211



04 




Depending on the application, other routines are provided for this (e.g., motion-Id for 

command positioning). 

NOTE 

You can only use the toggle signal of bit 7 when device controllers 3:terminals, 4:USS, 5:CANopen, 

6:PROFIBUS or 23:EtherCAT are used. If you configured a DSP 402 device controller, bit 7 always 

has signal status 0. 


E941 

Global 

read (3) 

Id-min: Display of the smallest value that the controller can request as a reference value for E92 

Id. The current reference value is displayed in E165 Id-ref. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:32767·LSB=800,0%); USS-Adr: 05 EB 40 00 hex 


F.. Control Interface 


F01 

Axis 

n brake release: The specified speed is represented internally as a frequency at which the 

brake is released in control mode B20 = 0:V/f-control or B20 = 1:sensorless vector control. 

2A01h 0h 

r=2, w=2 

F02 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F06 

Axis 

r=2, w=3 

The speed is not evaluated in control mode B20 = 2:vector control or B20 = 64:servo-control. 



Only visible when B20 = 0:V/f-control or B20 = 1:SLVC and F08 is not 0:inactive. 

n-brake set: When this speed is passed below during halting, the brake is applied. 



Only visible when B20 = 0:V/f-control or B20 = 1:SLVC and F08 is not 0:inactive. 

T-brake release: Only when F08 = 1 (brake). Defines the release time of the connected brake. 

Select F06 as a factor 1.3 greater than the time t2 (SMS Catalog, Section M: Servo Motors 

ED+EK). When the halt/quick stop signal is enabled or removed, the release is delayed by the time 

F06. 

NOTE 

When a coupling relay is used, the brake release time must be increased by the trigger time of the 

relay. 

For B07 = 0 (only for SDS 5000) and B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with 

data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next 

switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile 

memory. For permanent changes, set B07 = 1 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. 

Note that in this case F07 can also no longer be read from the name plate. 




2A02h 

2A06h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 212



04 




F07 T-brake set: Only when F08 = 1 (brake). Defines the application time of the connected brake. 2A07h 0h 

Axis 

Select F07 as a factor 1.3 greater than the time t1 (SMS Catalog, Section M: Servo Motors 

ED+EK). With the removal of the enable and halt/quick stop, the drive still remains in the control for 

r=2, w=3 the time F07. 

NOTE 

When a coupling relay is used, the brake application time must be extended by the opening time of 

the rely. 

For B07 = 0 (only for SDS 5000) and B04 = 1, this parameter is described after each power on with 

data from the electronic name plate. Any manual changes are therefore only effective until the next 

switch off and switch on, even if the changes have been saved in the Paramodule in non-volatile 

memory. For permanent changes, set B07 = 1 and then save the changes with A00 = 1. 

Note that in this case F06 can also no longer be read from the name plate. 




F08 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Brake: Activates the control of the halting brake by the inverter. When F08 is parameterized to 

0:inactive, the status of brake activation corresponds to the status of A900. 

With SDS 5000, F08 must be activated so that F09 can be set and actions B300, B301 and B302 

can be triggered. When B310 brake management is active, F08 must be activated. 

2A08h 

0h 

Information 

A change in this parameter does not take effect for the brake management of the SDS 5000 until 

after the device is turned off and on again 

0: inactive; The brake is not controlled by the application. It is always released with enable on (24 V 

on X2). 

1: active; The brake is activated by the application. The activation of the brake is triggered by 

setting the stop or quick stop signal and removing the enable. 

The integral portion of the speed controller (reference torque) is saved at the moment the brake is 

applied and restored during the restart. 

The saved torque is deleted when the enable is deactivated (A900 = 0). 

2: Do not save torque; The function of the brake is identical to the selection 1:active. 

The integral portion of the speed controller (reference torque) is NOT saved. 


F09 

Utilized brakes: 

2A09h 

0h 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

WARNING 

Danger of injury and property damage! Selection of the actions B300 Brake test or B301/B302 

brake 1/2 grind without an actually connected brake can cause dangerous, unintentional 

movements of the drive with maximum motor torque! It is very important to adjust the setting of this 

parameter to the wiring of the brake! 

Parameter F09 specifies which brake will have cyclic status monitoring. If the reported status of the 

brake does not coincide with that of the controller, fault 34 hardware defect, cause 4:brake1 or 

5:brake2 will be triggered. 

Actions B300 brake test and B301/B302 brake 1/2 grind use parameter F09 to determine which 

brakes are present. The actions are only performed on brakes which were parameterized before as 

present. 

ID 441727.02 213



04 




Information 

The settings for brake management must be performed for every configured axis (e.g., in 1.F09 for 

axis 1 and in 3.F09 for axis 3). 

1: Brake1, Only one brake is connected to X300.1 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module. 

2: Brake2, Only one brake is connected to X300.3 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module. 

3: Brake 1and2; Two brakes are connected to X300 of STÖBER's BRS 5000 brake module. 



F10 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Relay 1-function: The parameters for the behavior of relay 1 are set in F10. 

. 

0: Function 0; 

Relay 1 is open if no configuration is active or 

E48 device status: 

0: Self-test 

5: Malfunction 

6: Malfunction reaction active 

Relay 1 is closed if a configuration is active and 


1: Switch on inhibit 

2: Ready for switch on 

3: Switched on 

4: Operation enabled 

7: Fast stop active 

. 

1: Function 1; 

Relay 1 is open if no configuration is active or 


0: Self-test 

1: Switch on inhibit 

5: Malfunction 

2A0Ah 

0h 

Relay 1 is closed if a configuration is active and 


2: Ready for switch on 

3: Switched on 

4: Operation enabled 

6: Malfunction reaction 

7: Fast stop active 


F11 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

AE1-Offset: F11 is added to E10. The result is multiplied by F12. This signal is supplied to the 

configuration. To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the 

controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F11 with the opposite sign. 

Value range in V: -10.000 ... 0,000 ... 10.000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 02 C0 00 hex 

Only visible when a board is installed in the bottom option slot. 

2A0Bh 

0h 

F12 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

AE1-gain: The result of the addition of F11 and E10 is multiplied by F12. This signal is supplied to 

the configuration. 

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100,0 ... 400.0 



2A0Ch 

0h 

ID 441727.02 214



04 




F13 

Axis 

AE1 ref low pass filter: The time constant for filtering a reference value specified on AE1 is 

parameterized in F13. 

2A0Dh 0h 


r=2, w=2 Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 03 40 00 hex 

F14 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

AE1-mode selector: The reference value mode for AE1 is set in F14. When 0:-10V to 10V is 

selected, a voltage reference value can be connected to AE1 in the specified range. 

The selections 1 and 2 can be set when a current reference value is specified. With 1: 0 to 20mA 

the specification 0 mA is interpreted as the minimum reference value and 20 mA as the maximum 

reference value. This interpretation is reversed for the setting 2. In other words, at 0 mA (wire 

break) the motor is activated with the maximum reference value (pump control). 

Wire break monitoring can be activated in F15 for the settings 3 and 4. With these settings a current 

reference value of 4 to 20 mA is connected. With 3:4 to 20 mA, 4 mA is processed as the minimum 

reference value and 20 mA as the maximum reference value. When the selection is 4:20 to 4 mA, 

processing is reversed (i.e., at 4 mA the motor is activated with the maximum reference value). 

0: -10V to 10V; 

1: 0 to 20mA; 

2: 20 to 0mA; 

3: 4 to 20mA; 

4: 20 to 4mA; 


2A0Eh 

0h 

F15 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

Wire breakage sensing: When F14 is set to 3:4 to 20 mA or 4:20 to 4 mA, wire break 

monitoring can be activated in F15. Active wire break monitoring means that application event 4 will 

be generated as per the parameterization in U140 to U142 if a wire break occurs. The drive 

continues at the velocity which was valid before the wire break until either a fault is generated by 

the event parameterization, the enable is switched off or the drive is stopped with a stop or quick 

stop command. 

2A0Fh 

0h 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


F21 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

AE2-Offset: F21 is added to E11. The result is multiplied by F22. This signal is supplied to the 

configuration. To compensate for an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the 

controller specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F21 with the opposite sign. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 05 40 00 hex 


2A15h 

0h 

F22 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

AE2-gain: F21 is added to E11. The result is multiplied by F22. This signal is supplied to the 

configuration. 

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100,0 ... 400.0 



2A16h 

0h 

F23 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 05 C0 00 hex 

2A17h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 215



04 




F31 AE3-Offset: F31 is added to E74. The result is multiplied by F32. This signal is supplied to the 2A1Fh 0h 

Axis 

configuration. To compensate an offset (the value which arrives at the inverter when the controller 

specifies 0 V), this must be entered in F31 with opposite sign. 

r=2, w=2 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 07 C0 00 hex 


F32 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F33 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F40 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

AE3-gain: F31 is added to E74. The result is multiplied by F32. This signal is supplied to the 

configuration. 

Value range in %: -400.0 ... 100,0 ... 400.0 








Analog-output1-source: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from 

the parameters F40 to F44: 

Up to and including V 5.6-C: 

1. The following intermediate result is initially calculated: (value of the parameter entered in F40) x 

F42 + F41 

2. This intermediate result is then smoothed with the time constant specified in F43. 

3. If this is activated in F44, the amount is formed from the smoothed value. 

From V 5.6-D 


F42 



4. The offset F43 is then added. 

A voltage of ±10 V is output on the terminals. The resolution is approx. 10 mV. The scanning time 

corresponds to A150. 

Enter the coordinate of the parameter in F40 whose value you want to output to AA1. You can only 

enter parameters with the data type 16-bit with sign as the source (data type I16, ± 16384 = ± 10 

V). 




2A20h 

2A21h 

2A28h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 216



04 




F41 

Axis 

Analog-output1-offset: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the 

parameters F40 to F44: 

2A29h 0h 

r=2, w=2 



F42 + F41 



From V 5.6-D 


F42 






Enter the offset in F41. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 0A 40 00 hex 


F42 

Axis 

Analog-output1-gain: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from the 


2A2Ah 

0h 

r=2, w=2 



F42 + F41 



From V 5.6-D 


F42 






Enter the ratio factor in F42. 

Value range in %: -3198.9 ... 100,0 ... 3198.9 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:1024·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 06 0A 80 00 hex 


ID 441727.02 217



04 




F43 

Axis 

Analog-output1-act low pass filter: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as 

follows from the parameters F40 to F44: 

2A2Bh 0h 

r=2, w=2 



F42 + F41 



From V 5.6-D 


F42 






Enter the time constant for smoothing the intermediate result in F43. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 0A C0 00 hex 

F44 

Axis 

Analog-output1-absolut: The value output in analog output AA1 is calculated as follows from 


2A2Ch 

0h 

r=2, w=2 



F42 + F41 



From V 5.6-D 


F42 






In F44, activate the amount generation for analog output AA1. Amount generation is activated when 

you set F44 = 1:active. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


ID 441727.02 218



04 




F50 

Axis 

Analog-output2-source: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from 


2A32h 0h 

r=2, w=2 



F52 + F51 



From V 5.6-D 


F52 






Enter the coordinate of the parameter in F50 whose value you want to output to AA2. You can only 

enter parameters with the data type 16-bit with sign as the source (data type I16, ± 16384 = ± 10 

V). 




F51 

Axis 

Analog-output2-offset: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the 


2A33h 

0h 

r=2, w=2 



F52 + F51 



From V 5.6-D 


F52 






Enter the offset in F51. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 20.000 V); USS-Adr: 06 0C C0 00 hex 


ID 441727.02 219



04 




F52 

Axis 

Analog-output2-gain: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from the 


2A34h 0h 

r=2, w=2 



F52 + F51 



From V 5.6-D 


F52 






Enter the ratio factor in F52. 

Value range in %: -3198.9 ... 100,0 ... 3198.9 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I16; (raw value:1024·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 06 0D 00 00 hex 


F53 

Axis 

Analog-output2-act low pass filter: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as 

follows from the parameters F50 to F54: 

2A35h 

0h 

r=2, w=2 



F52 + F51 



From V 5.6-D 


F52 






Enter the time constant for smoothing the intermediate result in F53. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1ms; Type: I32; raw value:1LSB=Fnct.no.11; USS-Adr: 06 0D 40 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 220



04 




F54 

Axis 

Analog-output2-absolut: The value output in analog output AA2 is calculated as follows from 


2A36h 0h 

r=2, w=2 



F52 + F51 



From V 5.6-D 


F52 






In F54, activate the amount generation for analog output AA2. Amount generation is activated when 

you set F54 = 1:active. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


F61 

BA1-source: The value of the parameterized coordinate is output on binary output 1 (X101.8). 

2A3Dh 

0h 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 

Please remember that binary output BA1 is already being used by the encoder simulation via the 

binary outputs. In this case no entry is permitted in F61. 

Value range: A00 ... F181 ... A.Gxxx.yyyy (Parameter number in plain text) 



F62 


2A3Eh 

0h 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 

Please remember that binary output BA2 is already being used by the encoder simulation via the 

binary outputs. In this case no entry is permitted in F62. 




F63 


2A3Fh 

0h 

Axis 


r=2, w=2 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U32; raw value:USS-Adr; USS-Adr: 06 0F C0 00 hex 


ID 441727.02 221



04 




F64 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 





2A40h 0h 

F65 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F66 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F67 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F68 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F69 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F70 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F80 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 























BA1 on delay: A signal which is output on BA1 can be delayed with the parameters F80 and 

F81. When a value is entered in F80, the switchon procedure of the signal is delayed by this 

number of milliseconds. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U32; (raw value:1LSB=0,00099999993131496·ms); USS-Adr: 06 14 00 00 hex 


2A41h 

2A42h 

2A43h 

2A44h 

2A45h 

2A46h 

2A50h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 222



04 




F81 BA1 off delay: A signal which is output on BA1 can be delayed with the parameters F80 and 2A51h 0h 

Axis 

F81. When a value is entered in F81, the switchoff procedure of the signal is delayed by this 


r=2, w=2 


F82 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F83 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F84 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

F85 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 



BA1 inverting: When the parameter F82 is activated, the output of the signal entered in F61 is 

inverted on BA1. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 



BA2 on delay: A signal which is output on BA2 can be delayed with the parameters F83 and 

F84. When a value is entered in F83, the switchon procedure of the signal is delayed by this 



Fieldbus: 1LSB=1ms; Type: U32; (raw value:1LSB=0,00099999993131496·ms); USS-Adr: 06 14 C0 00 hex 


BA2 off delay: A signal which is output on BA2 can be delayed with the parameters F83 and 

F84. When a value is entered in F84, the switch-off procedure of the signal is delayed by this 





BA2 inverting: When the parameter F85 is activated, the output of the signal entered in F62 is 

inverted on BA2. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 



2A52h 

2A53h 

2A54h 

2A55h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

F90 

Global 

r=2, w=3 

Release time axis-switch: Specifies the release time of the contactor used for the axis 

switchover. This minimum time is waited before the inverter lets the next contactor be applied. 



2A5Ah 

0h 

F91 

Global 

r=2, w=3 

Set time axis-switch: Specifies the set time of the contactor used for the axis switchover. This 

time is at least waited before the inverter lets the axis be electrified. 



2A5Bh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 223



04 




F100 Brake release source: Selection of the source for the "release brake" signal. The signal can be 2A64h 0h 

Global, OFF 

permanently pre-specified as supplied by the binary inputs or the fieldbus. With F100 = 2:Parameter, 

A180, bit 6 (global parameter) is used as the signal source. This is the setting for fieldbus 

r=1, w=1 operation. 

CAUTION 

The "release brake" signal releases the brake regardless of the device state - this may cause 

accidental movements. 

F181 

Global 

read (1) 

0: Low; 

1: High; 

2: parameter; 

3: BE1; 


5: BE2; 


7: BE3; 


9: BE4; 


11: BE5; 


13: BE6; 


15: BE7; 


17: BE8; 


19: BE9; 


21: BE10; 


23: BE11; 


25: BE12; 


27: BE13; 



BA1: Bit 0 from the BA control bits byte F210. In the "comfort reference value" application, the 

status of BE1 can be indicated based on F209. 

0: Low; 

1: High; 



2AB5h 

0h 

F182 

Global 

read (1) 



0: Low; 

1: High; 

2AB6h 

0h 



ID 441727.02 224



04 




F183 

Global 



2AB7h 0h 

0: Low; 

read (1) 

1: High; 

F184 

Global 

read (1) 

F185 

Global 

read (1) 

F186 

Global 

read (1) 

F187 

Global 

read (1) 

F188 

Global 

read (1) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 06 2D C0 00 hex 




0: Low; 

1: High; 





0: Low; 

1: High; 





0: Low; 

1: High; 





0: Low; 

1: High; 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 06 2E C0 00 hex 




0: Low; 

1: High; 



2AB8h 

2AB9h 

2ABAh 

2ABBh 

2ABCh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 225



04 




F210 BA control bits: The parameter F210 is primarily used to permit a higher-level controller access 2AD2h 0h 

Global 

to the binary outputs of the inverter. The individual bits of F210 are automatically extracted in the bit 

parameters F181 ... F188. With the help of the parameters F61 ... F70, the individual bits can be 

r=2, w=2 written to the binary outputs. 

In the "comfort reference value" application, the function of F210 can be changed with the 

parameter F209. 




G.. Technology 


G90 

Global 

PLL: The parameter activates PLL control. PLL control synchronizes the inverter with the SYNC 

telegrams of the CAN bus or the SYNC signal of the EtherCAT bus. 

2C5Ah 0h 

Information 

r=3, w=3 

Do not change this parameter if you are using the EtherCAT PCB ECS 5000 or the Integrated Bus 

(IGB)! In these cases, the parameter is set automatically. A manual change can cause the 

synchronization to malfunction. 

G91 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

G92 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

G93 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

G95 

Global 

read (3) 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


PLL phase-offset: Time offset value between the arrival of the SYNC telegram and the phase 

position of the cycle time on the inverter. 

Value range in µs: -32768 ... -800 ... 32767 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 07 16 C0 00 hex 

Only when the value of the parameter is not 0 for the next smaller coordinate divisible by 10. 

PLL gain: Proportional gain of PLL control. 

The gain must be reduced when the jitter of the SYNC telegrams increases. 

Value range in %: 0.0 ... 20,0 ... 100.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1%; Type: I32; (raw value:2,14748E9·LSB=100%); USS-Adr: 07 17 00 00 hex 


PLL low pass: Determines the limit frequency of the low pass filter of PLL control. 

The time must be increased when the jitter of the SYNC telegrams increases. 




PLL status: Shows the status of PLL control. 

• Bit-0: PLL status 

• Bit-1: PLL status 

00 PLL engaged 

01 Engaged, but more than half the control range is utilized (frequency too high). 

10 Engaged, but more than half the control range is utilized (frequency too low). 

11 PLL not engaged. 

2C5Bh 

2C5Ch 

2C5Dh 

2C5Fh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 226



04 


G.. Technology 


• Bit-2: Is 1 when PLL has extended the internal cycle time (A150). 

• Bit-3: Is 1 when control hits the limits of the control range. 

• Bit-4: Is 1 when the measured cycle time (G96) is greater than the specification (G98). 

• Bit-5: Is 1 when G90 = inactive (PLL is deactivated). 

• Bit-6: Reserved 

• Bit-7: Reserved 

G96 

Global 

read (3) 

G97 

Global 

read (3) 

G98 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

G104 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

G290 

Global 

read (3) 

G291 

Global 

r=3, w=3 



PLL measured cycle-time: Cycle time (filtered value) of the SYNC telegrams determined by 

PLL control. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I32; USS-Adr: 07 18 00 00 hex 


PLL cycle-correction: Cycle correction specified by PLL control. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1clock-cycles; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 07 18 40 00 hex 


Reference cycle-time: Specified value for the cycle time of the SYNC telegram. 

Value range in µs: 0 ... 4000 ... 8000 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1µs; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 07 18 80 00 hex 

Lead-Position Source: Selects the source encoder for a lead axis position which is indicated in 

parameters E163 and E164. These parameters can be distributed via the IGB to forward the lead 

axis position to other inverters. 

Information 

A plausibility check can be performed with parameters G297 and G298 for the encoder selected 

with this parameter. 

Remember that not all applications contain parameters G297 and G298! 

0: inactive; No lead axis position is output. 

1: BE-encoder; The signals on binary inputs BE3, BE4 and BE5 are output as the lead axis 

position. 

2: X4-encoder; The signals on X4 are output as the lead axis position. 

3: X140-encoder; The signals on plug connector X140 are output as the lead axis position. 

4: X120-encoder; The signals on X120 are output as the lead axis position. 

5: virt. Master; The signals of the virtual master are output as the lead axis position. 


Only visible when E163 Lead-position producer exists. 

Error-evaluation lead-position source: This parameter indicates the current state of the 

error evaluation counter (see G298) for the encoder selected in G104. 

Value range: 0.0 ... 0,0 ... 12.0 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1; Type: I8; USS-Adr: 07 48 80 00 hex 

Error-counter lead-position source: This parameter counts the errors tolerated by the 

encoder selected in G104 since the new start of the device. 


2C60h 

2C61h 

2C62h 

2C68h 

2D22h 

2D23h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 227



04 


H.. Encoder 


X4-function: Function of encoder interface X4 (motor encoder). 

2E00h 0h 

H00 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H01 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H02 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H05 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H08 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 

Please remember that only the setting 3:Incremental-encoder In is available on the FDS 5000. 

NOTE 

Also please remember that a change in H00 may cause position values to be rescaled (in 

positioning applications). Scaling can take several seconds. 

0: inactive; 

3: incremental encoder in; (only for asynchronous motors) 

64: EnDat ® ; 

65: SSI master; 


X4-increments: Number of increments for the encoder set in H00. With incremental encoders, 

each increment supplies 4 counting increments via the edge evaluation and thus a four-fold higher 

resolution of the position. In the case of an SSI encoder, H01 functions as a gear factor, whereby 

1024 is equivalent to 1. Please contact STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK for other settings to the 

parameters for SSI encoders. 

Value range in inc/r: 30 ... 1024 ... 8191 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 00 40 00 hex 

Only visible when H00 = 3:EncoderIn. 

X4-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the encoder in the encoder acquisition. Can 

be used for reversed phases. Adhere to B05! 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Only visible when H00 is not 0:inactive. 

X4-SSI-code: Type of coding of the angle via the SSI encoder. 

0: gray; 

1: binary; 


Only visible when H00 = 65:SSI-Master. 

POSISwitch ® encoder selector: Available as an option, the POSISwitch ® control module 

permits the connection of several motors to one inverter. In H08 it can be set separately for each of 

the four (software) axes which connection on the POSISwitch ® (i.e., which motor) is allocated to the 

particular axis configuration. This routine permits two or more applications to be run together on 

separate (software) axes with a single motor. 

NOTE 

Following a change in parameter H08, correct evaluation of the electronic nameplate is not ensured 

until after a device new start. 

0: Enc1; 

1: Enc2; 

2: Enc3; 

3: Enc4; 


Only visible when a POSISwitch ® was detected on X4. 

2E01h 

2E02h 

2E05h 

2E08h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 228



04 


H.. Encoder 


H10 X4-SSI data bits: With 24 or 25-bit evaluation, the 12-bit highest significance for rotary encoders 2E0Ah 0h 

Axis, OFF 

corresponds to whole encoder rotations (multi-turns). Afterwards 12 or 13 bits within one rotation 

can still be coded. When 24-bit is set, the bit with the least significance is forced to 0. 

r=2, w=2 When 13-bit is set, all 13 bits code the angle within one rotation (single-turn). 

H11 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H14 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

H18 

Global, OFF 

read (2) 

H40 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

0: 25 

1: 24 

2: 13 short; Evaluation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 13-bit telegram. 

3: 13 tree; Evaluation of a 13-bit single-turn SSI encoder with 25-bit telegram. The evaluation 

ignores the upper 12 bits. 



X4 double transmission: Switches off double transmission for SSI encoder. When double 

transmission is activated, the angle is scanned twice in immediate succession to increase data 

reliability. If the encoder does not support double transmission, the inverter automatically switches 

off the monitoring but continues to scan twice. When double transmission is switched off with this 

parameter, the inverter no longer generates a second scan. 

Double transmission should not be deactivated if the hardware permits this function. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 



N-track monitoring: If there is an incremental encoder without zero track at X4, the cable 

monitoring for the zero track can be switched off at this point. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Only visible when H00 = 3:EncoderIn. 

POSISwitch ® port-status: Indicates as a binary word the POSISwitch ® ports to which encoders 

are connected. This is determined by the inverter during startup. 


Only visible when a POSISwitch ® was detected on X4. 

BE-encoder: Function of the encoder evaluation on BE3 (X101.13), BE4 (X101.14) and BE5 

(X101.15). 

The binary inputs have the following functions for the different settings: 

1: incremental encoder in 2: stepmotor in 

BE3 Zero track - 

BE4 Track A+ (Increments) freq.+ 

BE5 Track B+ (Direction of rotation) sign+ 

NOTE 



0: inactive; 

1: incremental encoder in; 

2: stepmotor In; 



2E0Bh 

2E0Eh 

2E12h 

2E28h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 229



04 


H.. Encoder 


H41 BE-increments: Increments per encoder revolution of the encoder on BE4 (X101.14) and BE5 2E29h 0h 

Axis, OFF 

(X101.15). With incremental encoders, each increment supplies 4 counting steps via edge 

evaluation and thus four times as high a resolution of the position. 

r=2, w=2 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 0A 40 00 hex 

Only visible when a board is installed in the bottom option slot and H40 is not 0:inactive. 

H42 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H60 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H62 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H63 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

BE-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the BE encoder in the encoder acquisition. 

Can be used for reversed motor phases. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 



BA-encodersimulation: Function of the encoder simulation on binary outputs BA1 and BA2 

(terminals X101.16 and X101.17). The encoder simulation is available as system function in all 

applications. 

Important: The encoder simulation only works when no other function is assigned to the binary 

outputs. If present at all in the application, the corresponding parameters F61 and F62 may not 

contain any entries (blank input). 

0: inactive; 

1: incremental encoder simulation; 

2: stepmotor Simulation; 



BA-inverted: Inverts the sign of the BA encoder simulation. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 



BA-increments: Increments of the encoder simulation on BA1 / BA2. When the source is an 

absolute value encoder, H63 specifies the increments as with a real incremental encoder. When the 

source is an incremental encoder, the scaling factor determines the selection. 1:2 means that half 

of the source increments are output on the BAs. 

1: 64 i/r(1:16); 

2: 128 i/r(1:8); 

3: 256 i/r(1:4); 

4: 512 i/r(1:2); 

5: 1024 i/r(1:1); 



2E2Ah 

2E3Ch 

2E3Eh 

2E3Fh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 230



04 


H.. Encoder 


H67 

Axis, OFF 

BA-encodersimulation source: Specifies which source is used as position encoder for the BA 

encoder simulation. 

2E43h 0h 

0: motor-encoder; 

r=2, w=2 

1: Configuration; H67 = 1 provides an opportunity to calculate as desired the increments to be 

output within the graphic configuration (e.g., as frequency proportionate to the motor torque). In 

standard applications, simulation with H67 = 1 usually does not take effect. 

2: position-encoder; 

H120 

Axis, OFF 



X120-Function: Function of plug connector X120 on the I/O terminal module expanded (XEA 

5000 and XEA 5001 respectively) and on the I/O terminal module resolver REA 5001 respectively. 

2E78h 

0h 

r=2, w=2 

NOTE 

The X120 interface on the REA 5000 option board permanently simulates TTL encoder signals in 

reference to a resolver connected to X140. 

This is the reason why this interface cannot be affected with H120. 

NOTE 



0: inactive; 

4: incremental encoder in; 

5: stepmotor In; 

67: SSI master; 

68: SSI slave; 

80: incremental encoder simulation; 

81: stepmotor Simulation; 

82: SSI simulation; 


H121 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

X120-increments: Increments per encoder rotation of the encoder on X120. With incremental 

encoders each increment supplies 4 counting steps via edge evaluation and thus four times as high 

a resolution of the position. 


2E79h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1inc/r; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 1E 40 00 hex 

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an encoder input is 

parameterized in H120. 

H122 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

X120-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the X120 encoder in the encoder 

acquisition. Can be used for reversed motor phases. Adhere to B05! 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 

2E7Ah 

0h 


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and H120 is not 0:inactive 

or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot. 

ID 441727.02 231



04 


H.. Encoder 


H123 X120-encoder simulation increments: Increments of the encoder simulation on X120. 2E7Bh 0h 

Axis, OFF 

When the source is an absolute value encoder, H123 specifies the increments as with a real 

incremental encoder. When the source is an incremental encoder, the scaling factor provides the 

r=2, w=2 selection. 1:2 means that half of the source increments are output on X120. 2:1 means that twice as 

many increments are output on X120. 

NOTE 

The X120 interface on the REA 5000 option board permanently simulates TTL encoder signals in 

reference to a resolver connected to X140. 

This is the reason why the scaling factor set in H123 always refers to X140 in this case. 

1: 64 i/r(1:16); 

2: 128 i/r(1:8); 

3: 256 i/r(1:4); 

4: 512 i/r(1:2); 

5: 1024 i/r(1:1); 

6: 2048 i/r(2:1); 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; USS-Adr: 08 1E C0 00 hex 

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and an encoder simulation 

is parameterized in H120 or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot. 

H124 

X120-zero position offset: Shift the zero pulse during incremental encoder simulation. 

2E7Ch 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

Value range in °: 0.0 ... 0,0 ... 360.0 

r=2, w=2 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,1°; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 1F 00 00 hex 

Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the lower option slot and an encoder simulation 

is parameterized in H120 or when an REA board is installed in the lower option slot. 

H125 

X120-SSI-Code: Type of angle coding via the SSI encoder and for the SSI simulation. 

2E7Dh 

0h 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

0: gray; 

1: binary; 


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an SSI functionality is 

selected in H120. 

H127 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

X120-encoder simulation source: Specifies which source will be used as position encoder 

for the X120 encoder simulation. 

0: Motorencoder; The encoder set in B26 is used as the source. 

1: Configuration; The virtual master is used as the source. 

2: Positions-encoder; The encoder set in I02 is used as the source. 

2E7Fh 

0h 




ID 441727.02 232



04 


H.. Encoder 


H130 X120-SSI-data bits: With evaluation or simulation with 24 or 25 bit, the 12-bit highest 

2E82h 0h 

Axis, OFF 

significance for rotary encoders corresponds to whole encoder rotations (multi-turns). Afterwards 12 

or 13 bits can still be coded within one rotation. When 24 bit is set, the bit with the least significance 

r=2, w=2 is forced to 0. 

With a setting to 13 bits, all 13 bits code the angle within one rotation (single-turn). 

NOTE 

Note that the SSI data bits are set with the parameter H126 in version V 5.2. For questions 

concerning the documentation of H126, contact electronics@stoeber.de. 

0: 25 

1: 24 

2: 13 short; Evaluation or simulation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 13-bit telegram 

3: 13 tree; Evaluation or simulation of a single-turn SSI encoder with 25-bit telegram. The upper 12 

bits are ignored for the evaluation. For simulation, 0 is forced. 




H131 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

X120 double transmission: Switches off double transmission for SSI encoder. When double 

transmission is activated, the angle is scanned twice in immediate succession to increase data 

reliability. If the encoder does not support double transmission, the inverter automatically switches 

off the monitoring but continues to scan twice with running switching cycle. When double 

transmission is switched off with this parameter, the inverter no longer generates a second scan. 

2E83h 

0h 

NOTE 

Double transmission should not be deactivated if the hardware permits this function. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 




H132 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

SSI-Timeout: The parameter activates timeout monitoring for SSI simulation on X120. Timeout 

monitoring triggers fault 37 when no position has been scanned during the last 5 ms for an MDS 

5000 or during the last 1.25 ms for an SDS 5000. 

If timeout monitoring is deactivated, the higher-level controller must ensure that the SSI 

transmission is error-free and within the correct cycle. This monitoring is then switched off on the 

drive! 

When the SSI simulation is part of an SSI motion bus (e.g., synchronous operation, cam), 

monitoring must remain on. Otherwise the SSI motion bus is not safe and, with it, the application. 

When the simulation is ready for operation after the inverter starts up, it also takes approx. 5 s 

before monitoring starts even if timeout is already activated. This gives the evaluated device 

(controller, other inverter) a somewhat longer startup time before the fault is triggered. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 




2E84h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 233



04 


H.. Encoder 


H133 

Global 

SSI simulation offset: This parameter specifies an offset for the SSI simulation. This is added 

to the value from the evaluation of a real source encoder. The parameter has no effect if a virtual 

master encoder is used as the SSI source. 

2E85h 0h 

r=3, w=3 

H134 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

H140 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H142 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 

H148 

Axis, OFF 

r=2, w=2 




N-track monitoring: If there is an incremental encoder without zero track at X120, the cable 

monitoring for the zero track can be switched off at this point. 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Only visible when an XEA board is installed in the bottom option slot and an encoder input is 


X140-function: Function of plug connector X140 on the resolver I/O terminal module (REA 5000, 

REA 5001). 

NOTE 



0: inactive; 

66: resolver; 

71: EnDat with sine and cosine; 


Only visible when a resolver option board is installed in the bottom option slot. 

X140-inverted: Inverts the sign of the angle supplied by the X140 encoder in the encoder 

acquisition. Can be used for reversed motor phases. Adhere to B05! 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


Only visible when a resolver option board is installed in the bottom option slot and H140 is not 

0:inactive. 

X140-resolver poles: Number of poles of the resolver on X140 (Firmware versions prior to V 

5.4 only permit the operation of two-pole resolvers). 

NOTE 

Only for use with an REA 5000. The incremental encoder simulation on X120 outputs a number of 

markers which is incremented by the factor H148/2 in comparison to the number of markers 


Value range: 2 ... 2 ... 6 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U8; (raw value:255 = 510); USS-Adr: 08 25 00 00 hex 

Only visible when E58 is parameterized as "REA 5000" or "REA 5001" and H140 = 

66:Resolver. 

2E86h 

2E8Ch 

2E8Eh 

2E94h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 234



04 


H.. Encoder 


H149 

Axis 

read (3) 

Sinus-Cosinus-Periods: The sine-cosine periods for an EnDat encoder (with sine-cosine 

tracks) connected to the X140 are displayed. The parameter is invisible if the parameter H140 X140 

function has not been set to 71: EnDat with sin-cos tracks. The parameter is also invisible if no REA 

5000 or REA 5001 option board is planned. 

2E95h 0h 

H300 

Axis, OFF 

r=3, w=3 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1·1/revolution; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 08 25 40 00 hex 

RefRetained: With the setting "1:active" the status "In Reference" (I86) is not deleted on the 

occurrence of an EnDat® CRC error on X4, as would otherwise normally be the case. The setting 

of H300 is relevant for the following parameter combinations: 

1. I02 = 2:X4-Encoder 

2. I02 = 0:Motor encoder and B26 = 2:X4-Encoder 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


2F2Ch 

0h 

R.. Production data 


R01.0 

Global 

Hardware-version power-unit for hardware: Number specifying the hardware status of the 

power pack. All changes in the hardware states are counted here. 

4201h 0h 

read (3) 

R01.1 

Global 

read (3) 

R02 

Global 

read (3) 


Hardware-version power-unit for software : Number specifying the hardware status of the 

power pack. Only changes in the hardware states which require a software adjustment are counted 

here. 


Power phases: Specifies whether the device is a single-phase or three-phase device. 

0: Single-phase; 

1: Three-phase; 


4201h 

4202h 

1h 

0h 

R03 

Power supply: Power supply of the input rectifier. 

4203h 

0h 

Global 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; USS-Adr: 12 00 C0 00 hex 

read (3) 

R04 

Global 

Nominal current async: Nominal current of the inverter for operation of asynchronous 

machines and normal switching (B24 = 4 kHz). 

4204h 

0h 

read (3) 


R05 

Global 

Upper temperature limit: Maximum permissible inverter temperature. When the measured 

inverter temperature E25 exceeds this value, a fault "38:Temperature device sensor" is triggered. 

4205h 

0h 

read (3) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 12 01 40 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 235



04 




R24 

Global 

read (3) 

Nominal current servo: Nominal current of the inverter during operation with servo motors and 

normal switching (B24 = 8 kHz). 


4218h 0h 

R25 

Global 

read (3) 

R26 

Global 

read (3) 

R27 

Global 

read (3) 

R28 

Global 

read (3) 

R29 

Global 

read (3) 

R30 

Global 

read (3) 

Lower temperature limit: Minimum permissible inverter temperature. When the measured 

inverter temperature E25 passes below this value, a fault "38:temperature device sensor" is 

triggered. May indicate that the temperature sensor is defective. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1°C; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 328 °C); USS-Adr: 12 06 40 00 hex 

Maximum current async: Specifies the current strength above which the inverter triggers a 

fault "33:overcurrent" during operation with ASM. Specification is made in %, reference value is 

R04. 


Maximum current servo: Specifies the current strength above which the inverter triggers a 

fault "33:overcurrent" during operation with servo. Specification is made in %, reference value is 

R24. 


Upper voltage limit: Maximum permissible DC link voltage. When the measured DC link 

voltage E03 exceeds this value, a fault "36:high voltage" is triggered. 


Lower voltage limit: Minimum required DC link voltage. Represents the lower limit for 

parameter A35. 


Brake chopper available: Specifies whether a brake resistance can be connected to the 

inverter. 

0: inactive; No brake resistance possible. 

1: active; Brake resistance possible. 


4219h 

421Ah 

421Bh 

421Ch 

421Dh 

421Eh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

R31 

Global 

Brake chopper on level: The brake chopper is turned on at the latest when this value is 

exceeded. 

421Fh 

0h 

read (3) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1V; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 3277 V); USS-Adr: 12 07 C0 00 hex 

R32 

Global 

Brake chopper off level: The brake chopper is switched off at the latest when this value is 

passed below. 

4220h 

0h 

read (3) 


R33 

Global 

Maximum motor power: Maximum power which a motor that is operated on this inverter may 

have. Represents the upper limit for B11. 

4221h 

0h 

read (3) 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,001kW; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=0,01·kW); USS-Adr: 12 08 40 00 hex 

ID 441727.02 236



04 




R34 

Global 

read (3) 

Maximum brakeresistor power: Maximum power which a brake resistor that is connected to 

this inverter may have. Represents the upper limit for A22. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1W; Type: I16; (raw value:1LSB=10·W); USS-Adr: 12 08 80 00 hex 

4222h 0h 

R35 

Global 

read (3) 

R36.0 

Global 

read (3) 

R36.1 

Global 

read (3) 

Minimum brakeresistor resistance: Minimum resistance value which a braking resistor 

connected to this inverter must have. Represents the lower limit for A21. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1Ohm; Type: I16; (raw value:32767 = 3277 Ohm); USS-Adr: 12 08 C0 00 hex 

Hardware-version control-unit for hardware: Number specifying the hardware version of 

the control unit. All changes in the hardware states are counted here. 


Hardware-version control-unit for software: Number specifying the hardware version of 

the control unit. All changes in the hardware states which require a software adjustment are 

counted here. 


4223h 

4224h 

4224h 

0h 

0h 

1h 

T.. Scope 


T25 

Global 

Automatic scope start: When T25 is "1:active," Scope starts automatically after the 

configuration is downloaded. With a device new start, Scope is also automatically started with the 

settings saved last. 

4619h 0h 

r=3, w=3 

0: inactive; 

1: active; 


U.. Protection functions 


U00 

Global 

Level low voltage: Level at which the event "46:low voltage" is triggered due to cause "1:low 

voltage DC link voltage limit." 

4800h 0h 

2: Warning; After the tolerance time in U01 expires, the device assumes fault status. 

r=3, w=3 

3: Fault; When the value in A35 is passed below, the device immediately assumes fault status. 


U01 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Time low voltage: Can only be set with U00 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which the 

triggering of low voltage monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes 

fault status. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 00 40 00 hex 

Only visible when the appropriate event level is parameterized to 2:Warning. 

4801h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 237



04 




U02 Level overtemperature Device i2t: Parallel to the monitoring of the heat dissipater 

4802h 0h 

Global 

temperature, an additional protective function is offered via i²t. The device load can be indicated as 

a percentage via parameter E22. If the value in E22 is greater than 100 %, event 39 is triggered. 

r=3, w=3 When the event is triggered, a current limitation occurs in the control modes Servo, Vectorcontrol 

and Sensorless Vectorcontrol (SLVC). At the same time a quick stop is triggered when U02 is 

parameterized as a failure. Reduction of the current can mean that the quick stop is no longer 

executed correctly. 

WARNING 

Undesired sinking of the gravity-stressed axes! 

Remember that the current limitation also causes a torque limitation. 

This may cause gravity-stressed axes to sink. 

NOTE 

Remember that event 59 is always triggered when E22 is greater than 105 %. 

0: inactive; Device does not react to the triggering of U02. 

1: Message; When U02 is triggered, this is only indicated. The device continues to remain ready 

for operation. 

2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time in U03, the device assumes fault status (for E39, 

see chap. 17). 

3: Fault; After U02 is triggered, the device immediately assumes fault status (for E39, see chap. 

17). 


U03 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Time overtemperature Device i2t: Can only be set with U02 = 2:warning. Defines the time 

during which a trigger of the i²t monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device 

assumes fault status. 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 00 C0 00 hex 


4803h 

0h 

U10 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Level temperature motor i2t: Parallel to the monitoring of the positor line on the motor, the 

inverter simulates the motor temperature via an i²t model. The motor load is indicated as a 

percentage in parameter E23. If the value in E23 is greater than 100 %, event 45 is triggered. 

If a motor KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, the parameter is set to 2:warning. 


1: Message; Triggering of U10 is only indicated. The device continues to be ready for operation. 

2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time U11, the device assume fault status. 


480Ah 

0h 

U11 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

Time temperature motor i2t: Can only be set when U10 = 2:warning. Defines the time during 

which a trigger of i²t monitoring is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault 

status. 

If a motor KTY evaluation has been entered on the nameplate, the parameter is set to 1 s. 




480Bh 

0h 

ID 441727.02 238



04 




U12 Level motor connection: When the axis switch via POSISwitch ® is utilized, the inverter can 480Ch 0h 

Global 

test during switching whether the contactor of the motor to be switched off has actually broken 

contact (opened). In addition, under certain circumstances, it can be determined that no motor is 

r=3, w=3 connected. 

U15 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

U16 

Global 

r=3, w=3 

U20 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U21 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U30 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

0: inactive; 

3: Fault; 


Level MotorTMP: Trips when the motor temperature sensor on X2 triggers. 

2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time U16, the device assume fault status. 

3: Fault; The device immediately assumes fault status after the motor TMP is triggered. 


Time MotorTMP: Can only be set when U15 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which 

triggering of the motor TMP is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault 

status. 




Level M-Max limit: When the calculated motor torque exceeds the current torque limit in E62 

during stationary operation, event 47 is triggered. 


1: Message; Triggering of U20 is only indicated. The device continues to remain ready for 

operation. 

2: Warning; After expiration of the tolerance time in U21, the device assumes fault status. 

3: Fault; The device immediately assumes fault status after U20 is triggered. 


Time M-Max limit: Can only be set when U20 = 2:warning. Defines the time during which a 

drive overload is tolerated. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status. 




Emergency braking: In case of some malfunctions that normally result in the drive coasting 

down, emergency braking can be performed as an option. The emergency braking is treated like a 

malfunction fast stop for these malfunctions, however the emergency braking does not follow the 

fast stop ramp (D81), but is performed using an internally pre-calculated current. Emergency 

braking is only possible in the servo mode (B20=64:Servo). 

Only the malfunction reaction for the selected malfunctions is affected. 

In addition to the setting in U30, the malfunction fast stop must also be activated in A29. 

A39 (t-max. fast stop) should be set such that the emergency braking can be ceased. 

In the case of the following malfunctions in which the drive is switched so it is free of torque ("coasts 

down"), emergency braking can be performed as an option: 

• Malfunction 37:Encoder, 

• Malfunction 46:Overvoltage with cause 3:Line drop, 

• Malfunction 56:Overspeed. 

480Fh 

4810h 

4814h 

4815h 

481Eh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 239



04 




NOTE 

At the start of the emergency braking, brake actuation is triggered simultaneously. 

U80 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U81 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U82 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U83 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U100 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

0: inactive; all malfunctions for which a fast stop is not possible result in coasting down. The setting 

in A29 applies to the malfunctions for which a fast stop can be used. 

1: active; in the case of the malfunctions 37:Encoder, 56:Overspeed and 46:Undervoltage with 

cause 3:Line drop emergency braking is performed. The malfunction fast stop must be activated 

in A29. The malfunctions for which a fast stop can be used continue to react with the normal fast 

stop. 



Fault sample parameter 0: Each of the 10 fault memory entries has space for user-defined 

data which are also saved when a fault is triggered. The parameter to be recorded is set here. 











Level application event 0: Application-specific event no. 60. Starting with the level 

"1:message," the display shows the event number with the text specified in U102 (e.g., "60:my 

fault") when this event occurs. 

0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 


4850h 

4851h 

4852h 

4853h 

4864h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

U101 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Time application event 0: Can only be set with U100 = 2:warning. Defines the time during 

which the event remains a warning. After expiration of this time, the device assumes fault status. 




4865h 

0h 

U102 

Text application event 0: Text which appears on the display when the event is triggered. 

4866h 

0h 

Axis 

Default setting: FollowError 

r=3, w=3 


ID 441727.02 240



04 




U110 Level application event1: Application-specific event no. Nr. 61. Starting with the level 

486Eh 0h 

Axis 

"1:message," the display shows the event number with the text specified in U112 (e.g., "61:my 

fault") when this event occurs. 

r=3, w=3 

0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 


U111 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Time application event 1: Can only be set when U110 = 2:warning. Defines the time during 



Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 1B C0 00 hex 


486Fh 

0h 

U112 

Text application event 1: Indication which appears on the display when the event is triggered. 

4870h 

0h 

Axis 

Default setting: LimitSwitch 

r=3, w=3 


U120 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 


"1:message," the event number and the text specified in U122 (e.g., "62:my fault") appear on the 

display when this event occurs. 

0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 

4878h 

0h 


U121 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 




Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 1E 40 00 hex 


4879h 

0h 

U122 


487Ah 

0h 

Axis 

Default setting: Ext2 

r=3, w=3 


U130 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

Level application event 3: Application-specific event no. 63. Starting with level "1:message," 

the event number and the text specified in U132 (e.g., "63:my fault") appear on the display when 

this event occurs. 

0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 

4882h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 241



04 




U131 

Axis 


which the event remains a warning. After this time expires, the device assumes fault status. 

4883h 0h 


r=3, w=3 Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 20 C0 00 hex 


U132 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U140 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U141 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U142 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U150 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U151 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U152 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 







0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 








Default setting: currentloop lost 





0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 










4884h 

488Ch 

488Dh 

488Eh 

4896h 

4897h 

4898h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 242



04 




U160 

Axis 




48A0h 0h 

r=3, w=3 

U161 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U162 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U170 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U171 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U172 

Axis 

r=3, w=3 

U180 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

U181 

Axis 

r=2, w=2 

0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 













0: inactive; 

1: Message; 

2: Warning; 

3: Fault; 





Fieldbus: 1LSB=0,01s; Type: U8; (raw value:2 Bit=1·s); USS-Adr: 15 2A C0 00 hex 




Fieldbus: Type: Str16; USS-Adr: 15 2B 00 00 hex 

Text external fault 1: In addition to the 8 external events whose level (fault, warning, and so 

on) can be specified as desired by the user, two other events which always trigger a fault are 

available for application development. The related fault messages are specified by the parameters 

U180 and U181. 

Default setting: ExtFault1 


Text external fault 2: See U180. 

Default setting: ExtFault2 


48A1h 

48A2h 

48AAh 

48ABh 

48ACh 

48B4h 

48B5h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 243



04 


Z.. Fault counter 


Z31 Short/ground.: The parameter indicates how frequently event 31:short/ground has occurred. 521Fh 0h 

Global Event description: 

Trigger: The hardware overcurrent switchoff is active. 

read (3) Cause: 

• The motor requires too much current from the inverter (interwinding fault, 

overload) 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment. 

Other: 

The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper cuts out. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 07 C0 00 hex 

Z32 

Global 

read (3) 

Short/ground internal: The parameter indicates how frequently event 32:short/ground internal 

has occurred. 

Event description: 

Trigger: When the device switches on (switch on 24 V with power supply already 

present) a short-circuit ground fault is detected. 

Cause: 

• There is a device-internal bridge short-circuit or an internal or external ground 

fault. 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on or programmed acknowledgment 

Other: 

The power stage is switched off on the hardware side. The motor always coasts 

down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present. 

Please send the device in for repair. 

5220h 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 08 00 00 hex 

Z33 

Global 

read (3) 

Overcurrent: The parameter indicates how frequently event 33:overcurrent has occurred. 


Trigger: The total motor current exceeds the permissible maximum. 

Cause: 

• Acceleration times too short 

• Wrong torque limitations in parameters C03 and C05 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

The motor always coasts down. 

5221h 

0h 


Z34 

Global 

read (3) 

Hardware fault: The parameter indicates how frequently event 34:hardware fault has occurred. 


Trigger: A hardware error occurred. 

Cause: 

1: FPGA; Error while loading the FPGA. 

2: NOV-ST; Control unit memory defective (FERAM). 

3: NOV-LT; Power unit memory defective (EEPROM). 

4: brake 1; Activation of brake 1 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V 

power. 

5: brake 2; Activation of brake 2 is defective or the brake module has no 24 V 

power. 

11: currentMeas; Current offset measurement when device starts up - deviation 

too great 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Cannot be acknowledged 

Other: 

The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present. The 

inverter must be sent in for repairs. 

5222h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 244



04 




Z35 Watchdog: The parameter indicates how frequently event 35:watchdog has occurred. 

5223h 0h 

Global 


Trigger: The watchdog of the microprocessor has triggered. 


• The microprocessor is busy or it is faulty. 

Level: 

Fault 

Z36 

Global 

read (3) 

Z37 

Global 

read (3) 


Other: 

The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off while the 

inverter restarts. 


High voltage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 36:high voltage has occurred. 


Trigger: The voltage in the DC link exceeds permissible maximum (indication DC link 

voltage in E03). 

Cause: 

• Network voltage too high 

• Feedback of drive in braking mode (no brake resistor connected brake 

chopper deactivated with A22=0 or defective). 

• Brake resistor too low (overcurrent protection) 

• Ramp too steep 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the 

malfunction is present. 


Encoder: The parameter indicates how frequently event 37:encoder has occurred. 


Trigger: Error by encoder. 

Cause: 

1: Para encoder; Parameterization does not match connected encoder. 

2: ParaChgOffOn; Parameterchange; Encoder parameterization cannot be 

changed during operation. Save and then turn device off and on so that the 

change takes effect. 

4: X4 chan.A/Clk; Wire break, track A / clock 

5: X4 chan.B/Dat; Wire break, track B / data 

6: X4 chan.0; Wire break, track 0 

7: X4EnDatAlarm; The EnDat ® encoder reported an alarm. 

8: X4EnDatCRC; The EnDat ® encoder reported that too many errors were 

found during the redundancy check. The cause can be wirebreak or errors in 

the cable shield. 

10: resol.carrier; Resolver is not or wrong connected, wirebreak is possible 

11: X140-undervol.; Wrong transmission factor 

12: X140-overvolt; Wrong transmission factor 

14: resol.failure; Wirebreak 

15: X120-double t; X120 double transmission occurred 

16: X120-Busy; Encoder gave no response for too long; bei SSI-Slave: bei 

freigegebenen Antrieb seit 5 ms keine Telegramm 

17: X120-wirebreak; A wire break was discovered on X120. 

18: X120-Timeout; 

19: X4-double tr.; X4 double transmission occurred 

20: X4-Busy; Encoder gave no response for too long 

21: X4-wirebreak; 

5224h 

5225h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 245



04 




22: AX5000; Acknowledgment of the axis switch is not effected. 

23: Ax5000require; Comparison of E57 and E70. 



26: No Enc. found; Either no encoder was found on X4 or the EnDat ® /SSI 

encoder has a wire break. 

27: AX5000 found; A functional AX 5000 option board was found on X4 

although incremental encoder or EnDat ® encoder was parameterized, or no 

EnDat ® encoder is connected to the AX 5000 option board. 

28: EnDat found.; An EnDat ® encoder was found on X4 although another 

encoder was parameterized. 

29: AX5000/IncEnc; Either X4 has a faulty AX 5000 option board or the A-track 

of an incremental encoder has a wire break. 

30: opt2 incomp.; Version of option 2 is not current. 

31: X140-EnDatAla; The EnDat ® encoder on X140 reports an alarm. 

32: X140-EnDatCRC; The EnDat ® encoder on X140 reports that too many faults 

were found during the redundancy test. Possible causes may be wire break 

or a cable shield fault. 

33: IGB-speed; G297 exceeded on the IGB. 

34: Battery low; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the 

voltage of the battery has fallen below the warning limit of the encoder. 

Referencing of the axis remains intact. However, the remaining service life of 

the backup battery is limited. Replace the AES battery before the next time 

the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating instructions for the 

Absolute Encoder Support AES. 

35: Battery empty; While switching on the inverter it was determined that the 

voltage of the battery has fallen below the minimum voltage of the encoder. 

Referencing of the axis has been deleted. The backup battery is no longer 

able to retain the position in the encoder over the time during which the 

inverter in switched off. Referencing the axis. Replace the AES battery 

before the next time the inverter is switched off. Note also the operating 

instructions for the Absolute Encoder Support AES. 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Turn the device off/on for causes 7, 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14. Programmed 

acknowledgment for other causes. 

Other: 

The motor always coasts down. 

CAUTION 

With positioning applications, the reference is deleted by the event "37:encoder." 

After acknowledgment, referencing must be performed again. 


Z38 

Global 

read (3) 

Overtemp.device sensor: The parameter indicates how frequently event 38:overtemp.device 

sensor has occurred. 


Trigger: The temperature measured by the device sensor exceeds the permissible 

maximum value or is below the permissible minimum value. 

Cause: 

• Ambient/switching cabinet temperatures too high or to low. 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

The permissible temperatures are stored on the power section of the inverter. 


5226h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 246



04 




Z39 Overtemp.device i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 39:overtemp.device i2t 5227h 0h 

Global 

has occurred. 


read (3) Trigger: The i 2 t model for the inverter exceeds 100 % of the thermal load. 

Cause: 

• Inverter overloaded (e.g., because motor blocked). 

• Too high clock pulse frequency. 

Z40 

Global 

read (3) 

Z41 

Global 

read (3) 

Level: 

Other: 

Inactive, message, warning or fault, can be parameterized in U02 (Default: fault). 

When the event is triggered, a current limitation occurs initially for control types 

servo and vector control. At the same time, a quick stop is triggered as a fault 

when parameterized in U02. Reduction of the current may mean that the quick 

stop is no longer executed correctly! 


Invalid data: The parameter indicates how frequently event 40:invalid data has occurred. 


Trigger: A data error was detected when the non-volatile memory was initialized. 

Cause: 

1 to 7: Control unit memory 

1: fault; Low-level read/write error or timeout. 


3: dataSecurity; Block has no data security. 

4: checksum; Block has checksum error. 

5: r/o; Block is r/o. 

6: readErr; Startup phase: block read error. 

7: blockMiss; Block not found . 

17 to 23: power unit memory 

17: fault; Low-level read/write error or timeout. 


19: dataSecurity; Block has no data security. 

20: checksum; Block has checksum error. 

21: r/o; Block is r/o. 

22: readErr; Startup phase: block read error. 


32 and 33: encoder memory 

32: el.mot-type; No nameplate data present. 

33: el.typeLim; Elecronic motor-type limit; nameplate parameters cannot be 

entered (limit or existence). 

48: optionBoard2; Error in memory of option 2 with REA 5000 and XEA 5000 

and XEA 5001 respectively. 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: The event cannot be acknowledged for cause 1 to 23 and 48. 

The inverter must be sent in for repairs. The event can be acknowledged for 

causes 32 and 33. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0A 00 00 hex 

Temp.MotorTMP: The parameter indicates how frequently event 41:temp.MotorTMP has 

occurred. 


Trigger: Motor temperature sensor reports excess temperature. (Connection terminals 

X2.3, X2.4). 

Cause: 

• The motor is overloaded. 

• The temperature sensor is not connected. 

Level: 

Fault 



5228h 

5229h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 247



04 




Z42 TempBrakeRes: The parameter indicates how frequently event 42:tempBrakeRes has occurred. 522Ah 0h 

Global 


Trigger: The i 2 t model for the brake resistor exceeds 100 % of the load. 


• The brake resistor may not be adequate for the application. 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Programmed acknowledgment. Acknowledgment by turning the device off/on is 

not recommended since the i 2 t model would be reset to 80 % in this case and 

there is a danger of the deceleration resistor being damaged. 

Other: 

The brake chopper is switched off as long as the malfunction is present. 


Z44 

Global 

read (3) 

External fault 1: The parameter indicates how frequently event 44:External fault 1 has occurred. 


Trigger: Application specific or by free programming option. 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

Should only be used for application events which may not be set lower than the 

"fault" level. 

522Ch 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0B 00 00 hex 

Z45 

Global 

read (3) 

Overtemp.motor i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 45:overtemp.motor i2t has 

occurred. 


Trigger: The i 2 t model for the motor has reached 100 % of load. 

Cause: 

• The motor is overloaded. 

Level: Can be parameterized as inactive, message or warning in U10 and U11. 


522Dh 

0h 


Z46 

Global 

read (3) 

Low voltage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 46:low voltage has occurred. 


Trigger: The DC link voltage is lower than the limit value set in A35. 

Cause: 

1: Low Voltage; The value in E03 DC-link-voltage has dropped below the value 

parameterized in A35 low voltage limit. 

2: Network phase; Phase monitoring has found that a switched-on power unit is 

missing a phase. 

3: Drop in network; When phase monitoring finds that the network voltage is 

missing, the charging relay is immediately switched off. Normal operation is 

maintained. If the power unit is still switched on after network voltage returns, 

Level: 

a fault is triggered after 0.5 s. 

Can be parameterized for cause 1 in U00 and U01. Warning with 10-second 

warning time for cause 2, fault for cause 3. 

Acknowledgment: Can be acknowledged for "fault" level by turning device off/on or programmed 

acknowledgment. 

Other: The motor always coasts down for cause 3. 

522Eh 

0h 


ID 441727.02 248



04 




Torque limit: The parameter indicates how frequently event 47:torque limit has occurred. 

522Fh 

Z47 

Global 

read (3) 

Z52 

Global 

read (3) 


Trigger: 

The maximum torque permitted for static operation is exceeded for the control 

types servo control, vector control or senorless vector control (E62:act. pos. M- 

max, E66:act. neg. M-max). 

Cause: • Limitation by parameters C03 and C05. 

Level: Can be parameterized in U20 and U21. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0B C0 00 hex 

Communication: The parameter indicates how frequently event 52:communication has 

occurred. 


Trigger: Communication fault 

Cause: 

1: CAN LifeGuard; The device recognized the "life-guarding-event" (master no 

longer sends RTR). 

2: CAN Sync Error; The sync message was not received within the time set in 

parameter A201 Cycle Period Timeout. 

3: CAN Bus Off; Went off when bus went off. The driver started it again. 

4: PZD-Timeout; Failure of the cyclic data connection (PROFIBUS). 

5: USS; (under preparation) failure of the cyclic data connection (USS). 

6: EtherCAT PDO; The inverter received no process data during the time set in 

A258. 

7: EtherCAT-DcSYNC0; There is a malfunction on the synchronization signal 

"SYNC 0". This malfunction can only occur with EtherCAT® synchronization 

activated using "Distributed Clock (DC)". 

8: IGB µC failure; The controller for IGB communication has failed. 

9: IGB Lost Frame; IGB-Motionbus fault. The station discovered the loss of at 

least 2 consecutive data frames (double error). This cause can only occur 

when the IGB state = 3:Motionbus and the motor is energized. 

10: IGB P.LostFra; IGB-Motionbus fault. Another station discovered a double 

error and reported this via A163. This causes that inverter to also malfunction 

with this cause. The cause can only occur when the IGB state = 3:Motionbus 

and the motor is energized. 

11: IGB Sync Erro; The synchronization within the inverter has malfunctioned 

because the configuration was stopped by POSITool. This fault can only occur 

when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized. 

12: IGB ConfigTim; A block was not executed at the beginning of the global 

area in real-time. The runtime sequence of blocks may have been set 

incorrectly. This fault can only occur when the IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus 

and the motor was energized. 

13: IGBPartnerSyn; Another station in the IGB network has a synchronization 

fault (see cause 11). This station reported its fault via A163. This causes that 

inverter to also malfunction with cause 13. This fault can only occur when the 

IGB state equaled 3:Motionbus and the motor was energized. 

Level: 

Fault 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0D 00 00 hex 

5234h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 249



04 




Z55 

Global 

Option board: The parameter indicates how frequently event 55:option board has occurred. 


5237h 0h 

read (3) 

Z56 

Global 

read (3) 

Z57 

Global 

read (3) 

Trigger: 

Cause: 

Error during operation with option board. 

1: CAN 5000 failure; CAN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

2: DP 5000 failure; DP5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

3: REA 5000 failure; REA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

4: SEA 5000 failure; SEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

5: XEA 5000 failure; XEA 5000 or XEA 5001was recognized, installed and 

failed. 

6: EncSim-init; Incremental encoder simulation could not be initialized on 

XEA. The motor may have turned during initialization. 

7: WrongOption; Incorrect or missing option board (comparison of E54/E58 

with E68/E69) or on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version (XEA 

5001: from HW 10, REA 5000: from HW19) 

8: LEA5000 failure; LEA 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. 

9: ECS5000 failure; ECS 5000 was recognized, installed and failed.. 

10: 24V failure; Failure of the 24 V supply for XEA 5001 or LEA 5000. 

11:SEA 5001 failure; SEA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 

12:REA 5001 failure; REA 5001 was recognized, installed and failed. 

13: PN5000 fail 1; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic 

hardware tests have detected an error. 

14: PN5000 fail 2; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. Basic software 

tests have detected an error. 

15: PN5000 fail 3; PN 5000 was recognized, installed and failed. The Watchdog 

function of the PN-5000 monitoring system has detected an error. 

17: Option2 too old; on SDS 5000: option board with old hardware version 

(XEA 5001: from HW 10, REA 5000: from HW 19) 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Turn device off/on for all causes or programmed acknowledgment of causes 1 to 

6 and 8 to 10. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0D C0 00 hex 

Overspeed: The parameter indicates how frequently event 56:overspeed has occurred. 


Trigger: The measured speed is greater than C01*1,1 + 100 rpm. 

Cause: 

• Encoder defective 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

The motor always coasts down (from V5.0D on). 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0E 00 00 hex 

Runtime usage: The parameter indicates how frequently event 57:runtime usage has occurred. 


Trigger: The cycle time of a real-time task was exceeded. 

Cause: 

2: RT2; Cycle time of real-time task 2 exceeded (1 msec) 

3: RT3; Cycle time of real-time task 3 exceeded (technology task) 



Level: 

Fault 



5238h 

5239h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 250



04 




Z58 

Global 

read (3) 

Grounded: The parameter indicates how frequently event 58:grounded has occurred. 


Trigger: Hardware signal from power section with MDS 5000 BG3 or SDS 5000 BG 3. 

Cause: 

• Asymmetrical motor currents. 

523Ah 0h 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

The motor always coasts down. The brake chopper is switched off as long as the 

malfunction is present. 

Z59 

Global 

read (3) 

Z60 

Global 

read (3) 

Z61 

Global 

read (3) 


Overtemp.device i2t: The parameter indicates how frequently event 59:overtemp.device i2t 

has occurred. 


Trigger: The i 2 t model calculated for the inverter exceeds 105 % of the thermal load. 

Cause: 

• Inverter overloaded (e.g., because motor is blocked). 

• Clock pulse frequency too high. 

Level: 

Fault 


Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0E C0 00 hex 

Application event 0: The parameter indicates how frequently event 60:application event 0 has 

occurred. 



Cause: 

• Can be programmed as desired for each axis separately. 

Level: Can be parameterized in system parameters U100. 


Other: 

- Message/warning: Evaluation in 256-msec cycle. 

- Fault: Evaluation in parameterizable cycle time (A150). Texts, times and level 

can be set in parameter group U.. starting with U100. 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0F 00 00 hex 


occurred. 



Cause: 




Other: 





523Bh 

523Ch 

523Dh 

0h 

0h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 251



04 




Z62 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



523Eh 0h 

Cause: 




Other: 





Z63 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



Cause: 




Other: 




523Fh 

0h 

Fieldbus: 1LSB=1; Type: U16; USS-Adr: 1A 0F C0 00 hex 

Z64 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



Cause: 




Other: 




5240h 

0h 


Z65 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



Cause: 




Other: 




5241h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 252



04 




Z66 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



5242h 0h 

Cause: 




Other: 





Z67 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 



Cause: 




Other: 




5243h 

0h 


Z68 

Global 

read (3) 

External fault 2: The parameter indicates how frequently event 68:external fault 2 has occurred. 



Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

Should be used for application events which can only be parameterized at the 

"fault" level. 

5244h 

0h 


Z69 

Global 

read (3) 

Motor connection: The parameter indicates how frequently event 69:motor connection has 

occurred. 


Trigger: 

Cause: 

Connection error of the motor. 

1: motorNotDiscon; The contactor did not open when the axis changed. This 

cause can only be determined when at least two phase contacts are stuck and 

the DC link is charged (see E03). No magnetization could be established with 

asynchronous motors. 

2: no motor; Possibly no motor connected or line to motor interrupted. 

Level: Can be parameterized as inactive or warning in U12. 


5245h 

0h 


ID 441727.02 253



04 




Z70 

Global 

Parameter consistency: The parameter indicates how frequently event 70:parameter 

consistency has occurred. 


5246h 0h 

read (3) 

Z71 

Global 

read (3) 

Trigger: 

Cause: 

The parameterization is contradictory. 

1: no servoencoder; No servo-type encoder; Control mode B20 is set to "servo" 

but no appropriate encoder is selected (B26, H.. parameter). 

2: X120 direction; X120 is used as source in one parameter but is 

parameterized in H120 as drain (or vice versa). 

3: B12B20; Control mode B20 is not set to servo but the nominal motor 

current (B12) exceeds the 4-kHz nominal current (R24) of the device by more 

than 1.5 times. 

4: B10H31; Resolver/motorpoleno.; the set motor pole number (B10) and the 

resolver pole number (H31) do not match. 

5: neg.slip; With the control modes V/f, SLVC or VC (B20). The values for motor 

nominal speed (B13), motor nominal frequency (B15) and motor pole number 

(B10) indicate a negative slip. 

6: torque-lim; When the values entered in C03 or C05 are used, the maximum 

current of the inverter would be exceeded. Enter lower torque limits. 

7: B26:SSI-Slave; SSI slave may not be used as motor encoder 

(synchronization problems). 

8: C01>B83; C01 may not be greater than B83. 

9: E102/E103 miss.; An attempt is made to move to a master position via the 

integrated bus but the required parameters E102 and E103 are missing. 

10: G104G27; A master position is sent via the IGB-Motionbus (i.e., G104 is 

not set to 0:inactive), but G27 does not have the settings 0:inactive and 

6:IGB which are valid for this case. 

Level: 

Fault 


Other: 

With an incorrect parameterization, a fault is not triggered until enabling takes 

place. 


Firmware: The parameter indicates how often the fault 71:firmware has occurred. 

Description of the event: 

Trigger: A firmware error was detected. 

Cause: 

1: FW defective; Only for SDS 5000: An error of the active firmware was 

discovered or faulty firmware was determined in the firmware download 

memory. Load the firmware again. 

2: Activate FW; Only for SDS 5000: The firmware was loaded to the inverter but 

not yet activated. Activate the firmware and perform a device new start! 

3: CRC-error; A firmware error was discovered. Turn the 24 V power off and on 

again. If the error occurs again on renewed OFF/ON, the device hardware is 

faulty and must be replaced. 

Level: 

Fault 

Acknowledgment: Turn device off and on again. 

Other: 

Causes 1 and 2 only occur during device startup so that the inverter cannot be 

enabled. Cause 3 can also occur during operation. 


5247h 

0h 

ID 441727.02 254



04 




Z72 

Global 

read (3) 

Brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 72:brake test has occurred. 


Trigger: Active brake management on the SDS 5000 means that the time set in B311 has 

expired without the B300 brake test action having been performed. 

5248h 0h 

Cause: 

1: B311timeout; The time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has expired 

without action B300 brake test having been executed. 

2: Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action, the stopping 

torque entered in B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the encoder test 

run included in the brake test was concluded with errors. 

Level: 

Message until twice the time set in B311 timeout for brake test B300 has 

expired. After that, fault. 

Acknowledgment: At the "fault" level, the event can be acknowledged for a period of 5 minutes so 

that the action B300 brake test can be executed. If this time expires without 

action B300 brake test having been executed successfully, the inverter resumes 

the "fault" state. If action B300 brake test is performed successfully, the event is 

automatically acknowledged. 

Other: 

This error is only generated with enable switched off. 


Z73 

Global 

read (3) 

Axis 2 brake test timeout: The parameter indicates how often the fault 73:ax2braketest has 

occured. 


Trigger: When brake management is active on the SDS 5000, the time set in B311 has 

expired without action B300 brake test having been executed with active axis 2. 

Cause: 


without action B300 brake test having been executed with active axis 2. 

2:Brake defective; During the execution of the brake test action with active axis 

2, the stopping torque entered in B304 or B305 could not be maintained or the 

encoder test run included in the brake test was concluded with errors. 

Level: 



5249h 

0h 



action B300 brake test having been executed successfully with active axis 2, the 

inverter resumes the "fault" state. If action B300 brake test is performed 

successfully, the event is automatically acknowledged. 

Other: 



Z74 

Global 

read (3) 


occurred. 




Cause: 






524Ah 

0h 

ID 441727.02 255



04 




Level: 








Other: 



Z75 

Global 

read (3) 


occured. 




Cause: 






Level: 








Other: 


524Bh 

0h 


ID 441727.02 256

Notes 


__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 


ID 441727.02

Global Presence 

Address registers 

Always up to date on the internet: www.stober.com → contact 

• Technical Offices (TB) for advice and marketing in Germany 

• Global presence for advice and marketing in about 25 countries 

• Service Network Germany 

• Service Network International 

• STÖBER Subsidiaries: 

Austria 

USA 

France 

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH 

Hauptstraße 41a 

4663 Laakirchen 

Fon +43 7613 7600-0 

Fax +43 7613 7600-2525 

E-Mail: office@stoeber.at 

www.stoeber.at 

STOBER DRIVES INC. 

1781 Downing Drive 

Maysville, KY 41056 

Fon +1 606 7595090 

Fax +1 606 7595045 

eMail: sales@stober.com 

www.stober.com 

STÖBER S.a.r.l. 

131, Chemin du Bac à Traille 

Les Portes du Rhône 

69300 Caluire et Cuire 

Fon +33 4 78989180 

Fax +33 4 78985901 

eMail: mail@stober.fr 

www.stober.fr 

Switzerland 

STÖBER SCHWEIZ AG 

Rugghölzli 2 

5453 Remetschwil 

Fon +41 56 496 96 50 

Fax +41 56 496 96 55 

eMail: info@stoeber.ch 

www.stoeber.ch 

China 

STOBER CHINA 

German Centre Beijing 

Unit 2010, Landmark Tower 2, 

8 North Dongsanhuan Road 

Chaoyang District 

100004 Beijing 

Fon +86 10 65907391 

Fax +86 10 65907393 

eMail: info@stoeber.cn 

www.stoeber.cn 

Great Britain 

STOBER DRIVES LTD. 

Upper Keys Business Village 

Keys Park Road, Hednesford 

Cannock WS12 2HA 

Fon +44 (0) 1543 458 858 

Fax +44 (0) 1543 448 688 

E-Mail: mail@stober.co.uk 

www.stober.co.uk 

Japan 

STOBER Japan 

P.O. Box 113-002, 6 chome 

15-8, Hon-komagome 

Bunkyo-ku 

Tokyo 

Fon +81 3 5395-6788 

Fax +81 3 5395-6799 

eMail: mail@stober.co.jp 

www.stober.co.jp 

Italy 

STÖBER TRASMISSIONI S. r. l. 

Via Risorgimento, 8 

20017 Mazzo di Rho (Milano) 

Fon +39 02 93909-570 

Fax +39 02 93909-325 

eMail: info@stoeber.it 

www.stoeber.it 

Singapore 

STOBER Singapore 

50 Tagore Lane 

#05-06B 

Entrepreneur Centre 

Singapore 787494 

Fon +632 241 89 - 01/02/03/04/05 

Fax +632 241 40 - 40/60 

E-Mail: info@stober.sg 

www.stober.sg 

www.stober.com

STÖBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG 

Kieselbronner Str. 12 

75177 PFORZHEIM 

GERMANY 

Tel. +49 (0)7231 582-0 

Fax. +49 (7231) 582-1000 

E-Mail: mail@stoeber.de 

24/h service hotline +49(0) 180 5 786 323 

www.stober.com 

Technische Änderungen vorbehalten 

Errors and changes excepted 

ID 441727.02 

11/2011

Used Parameters - STÃBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?

Used Parameters - STÃBER ANTRIEBSTECHNIK GmbH + Co. KG